2018 BMW x1 7

LINK:
CONTENT & A-Z
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
OWNER'S MANUAL.
THE BMW X1.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18

WELCOME TO BMW.
Owner's Manual.
BMW X1.
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on
the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the
Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information
on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features
available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining
the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of
the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
You can find supplementary information in the additional brochures in the on‐
board literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
NOTES
Information ......................................................................................................................... 8
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW at a glance .................................................................................................. 18
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit .............................................................................................................................. 36
iDrive .................................................................................................................................. 40
Voice activation system ............................................................................................... 49
General settings ............................................................................................................. 52
Owner's Manual media ................................................................................................ 64
CONTROLS
Opening and closing ..................................................................................................... 70
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ............................................................................ 91
Transporting children safely ..................................................................................... 102
Driving ............................................................................................................................. 107
Displays .......................................................................................................................... 129
Lights .............................................................................................................................. 145
Safety .............................................................................................................................. 150
Driving stability control systems .............................................................................. 171
Driving comfort ............................................................................................................. 177
Climate control ............................................................................................................. 197
Interior equipment ....................................................................................................... 206
Storage compartments .............................................................................................. 217
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ......................................................................... 224
Loading .......................................................................................................................... 228
Saving fuel ..................................................................................................................... 231
4
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communication, see Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle, Online Owner's Manual, BMW
Driver's Guide app.
MOBILITY
Refueling ........................................................................................................................ 240
Fuel .................................................................................................................................. 242
Wheels and tires .......................................................................................................... 244
Engine compartment ................................................................................................. 262
Engine oil ....................................................................................................................... 265
Coolant ........................................................................................................................... 269
Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 271
Replacing components .............................................................................................. 273
Breakdown assistance ............................................................................................... 283
Care ................................................................................................................................. 289
REFERENCE
Technical data .............................................................................................................. 296
Appendix ........................................................................................................................ 298
Everything from A to Z ............................................................................................... 300
© 2018 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID5 II/18, 03 18 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
6
NOTES
Information .................................................................................................... 8
7
NOTES Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Additional sources of
information
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a particu‐ Dealer’s service center
lar topic is by using the index.
A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in questions at any time.
the first chapter.
Internet
Updates made after the editorial The Owner's Manual and general information on
deadline BMW, for example on technology, are available
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐ on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
ences may exist between the printed Owner's
Manual and the following Owner's Manuals: Integrated Owner's Manual in the
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. vehicle
▷ Online Owner's Manual. The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app. scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
played on the Control Display. Additional
of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
information, refer to page 64.
Owner's Manual for Navigation,

BMW Driver’s Guide App
Entertainment, Communication
The BMW Driver's Guide app specifically de‐
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as cle. The app can be displayed on smartphones
printed book from the service center. and tablets. Additional information, refer to
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and page 65.
Communication can be called up via the follow‐
ing Owner's Manuals: Online Owner's Manual
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. The Online Owner's Manual specifically de‐
▷ Online Owner's Manual. scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app. cle. The Online Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played in any of today's browsers. Additional
information, refer to page 66.
8
Information NOTES
Symbols and displays fore, this Owner's Manual also describes and il‐
lustrates features and functions that are not
available in your vehicle, for example because of
Symbols in the Owner's Manual the selected optional features or the country-
specific version.
Symbol Meaning This also applies to safety-related functions and
Precautions that must be followed in systems.
order to avoid the possibility of injury When using these functions and systems, the
to yourself and to others as well as applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
serious damage to the vehicle. served.
Measures that can be taken to help For any options and equipment not described in
protect the environment. this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supplementary
Owner's Manuals.
"..." Texts in vehicle used to select
Your dealer’s service center is happy to answer
individual functions.
any questions that you may have about the fea‐
tures and options applicable to your vehicle.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
numbered list. The steps must be carried out in Status of the Owner's
the defined order. Manual
1. First action step.
2. Second action step. Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐
Enumerations icy of constant development that is conceived to
ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the
Enumerations without mandatory order or alter‐
highest quality and safety standards. In rare
native possibilities are presented as list with bul‐
cases, therefore, the features described in this
let points.
Owner's Manual may differ from those in your
▷ First possibility. vehicle.
▷ Second possibility.
Updates made after the editorial
Symbols on vehicle components deadline
This symbol on a vehicle component Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐
indicates that further information on the ences may exist between the printed Owner's
component is available in the Owner's Manual. Manual and the following Owner's Manuals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Vehicle features and ▷ Online Owner's Manual.
options ▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.

Notes on updates can be found in the appendix
This Owner's Manual describes all models and of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
all standard, country-specific and optional equip‐
ment that is offered in the model series. There‐
9
NOTES Information
For Your Own Safety Parts and accessories

BMW recommends the use of parts and acces‐
sory products approved by BMW.
Intended use
Approved parts and accessories, and advice on
Follow the following when using the vehicle:
their use and installation are available from a
▷ Owner's Manual. BMW dealer's service center.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove BMW parts and accessories have been tested by
stickers. BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW vehi‐
▷ Technical vehicle data. cles.
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
vehicle is driven. sories.
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory documents. BMW does not evaluate whether each individual
product from another manufacturer can be used
Warranty with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety
hazard, even if a country-specific official approval
Your vehicle is technically configured for the op‐
was issued. BMW does not evaluate whether
erating conditions and registration requirements
these products are suitable for BMW vehicles
applying in the country of first delivery, also
under all usage conditions.
known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be
operated in a different country it might be neces‐
sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing California Proposition 65
operating conditions and registration require‐ Warning
ments. If your vehicle does not comply with the California law requires vehicle manufacturers
homologation requirements in a certain country provide the following warning:
you may not be able to lodge warranty claims for
your vehicle there. Further information on war‐
ranty is available from a dealer’s service center. WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Automo‐
Maintenance and repairs bile components and parts, including compo‐
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
Advanced technology, e. g. the use of modern
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
materials and high-performance electronics, re‐
State of California to cause cancer and birth
quires suitable maintenance and repair work.
defects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
that you entrust corresponding procedures to a products of component wear contain or emit
BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose to chemicals known to the State of California to
use another service facility, BMW recommends cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
use of a facility that performs work, for instance ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
maintenance and repair, according to BMW lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
specifications with properly trained personnel, re‐ pounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals
ferred to in this Owner's Manual as "another known to the State of California to cause can‐
qualified service center or repair shop". cer. Wash your hands after handling. Used en‐
If work is performed improperly, for instance gine oil contains chemicals that have caused
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subse‐ cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
quent damage and related safety risks. your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
10
Information NOTES
water. For more information go to aware of any applicable warranty limitations or

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. exclusions for such country or region. In such
case, please contact Customer Relations for fur‐
ther information.
WARNING
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passen‐
Maintenance
ger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road
expose you to chemicals including engine ex‐ safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle
haust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, Limited Warranty.
which are known to the State of California to Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ ures:
ductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
▷ BMW Maintenance system.
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine ex‐
cept as necessary, service your vehicle in a ▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet for
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash US models.
your hands frequently when servicing your ve‐ ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
hicle. For more information go to Canadian models.
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov‐
Service and warranty ered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the follow‐
ing warranties: Data memory
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. General information
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty. Electronic control devices are installed in the ve‐
hicle. Some of these are necessary for the vehi‐
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
cle to function safely or provide assistance dur‐
▷ California Emission Control System Limited ing driving, for instance driver assistance
Warranty. systems. Furthermore, control devices facilitate
Detailed information about these warranties is comfort or infotainment functions.
listed in the Service and Warranty Information Electronic control devices contain data memo‐
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and ries, which are able to temporarily or permanently
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. store information about the condition of the vehi‐
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and cle, component load, maintenance requirements,
designed to meet the particular operating condi‐ technical events or faults.
tions and homologation requirements in your This information generally records the state of a
country and continental region in order to deliver component, a module, a system or the environ‐
the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is oper‐ ment, for instance:
ated under those conditions. If you wish to oper‐
▷ Operating states of system components,
ate your vehicle in another country or region, you
e.g., fill levels, tire inflation pressure, battery
may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet
status.
different prevailing operating conditions and ho‐
mologation requirements. You should also be
11
NOTES Information
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its indi‐ qualified service center or repair shop performs
vidual components, e.g., wheel rotational repair or servicing work.
speed, wheel speed, deceleration, transverse Data on the scope of servicing work performed
acceleration, engaged safety belt indicator. and maintenance records are stored in the vehi‐
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system cle by means of the service history and transfer‐
components, for instance lights and brakes. red to the vehicle manufacturer. The vehicle
▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events. owner can contact a dealer's service center to
object to the data being stored and transferred to
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
the vehicle manufacturer. This objection applies
tions such as airbag deployment or engage‐
for as long as the vehicle owner remains the pro‐
ment of the stability control systems.
prietor of the vehicle.
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain
sensor signals. Data entry and data transfer into
The data is required to perform the control de‐ the vehicle
vice functions. Furthermore, it also serves to rec‐
ognize and correct malfunctions, and helps the General information
vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle func‐
tions. The majority of this data is transient and is Depending on the vehicle equipment, some data
only processed within the vehicle itself. Only a can be transferred into the vehicle when using
small proportion of the data is stored in event or comfort and infotainment functions, for instance:
fault memories and, if needed, in the vehicle key. ▷ Multimedia data such as music or movies for
playback in an integrated multimedia system.
Reading out data ▷ Address book data for use in conjunction with
When servicing, for instance during repairs, serv‐ an integrated hands-free system or an
ice processes, warranty cases, and quality assur‐ integrated navigation system.
ance measures, this technical information can be ▷ Entered navigation destinations.
read out from the vehicle together with the vehi‐ ▷ Data on the use of Internet services.
cle identification number. A dealer’s service cen‐
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is
ter or another qualified service center or repair
found on a device that has been connected to
shop can read out the information. The socket
the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or
for OBD Onboard Diagnosis required by law in
MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it
the vehicle is used to read out the data. The data
can be deleted at any time. This data is only
is collected, processed, and used by the relevant
transmitted to third parties if expressly desired.
organizations in the service network. The data
This depends on the personal settings selected
documents the technical conditions of the vehi‐
for using online services.
cle, helps in locating faults and improving quality,
and is transferred to the vehicle manufacturer, if Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow‐
needed. ing comfort and individual settings can be stored
in the vehicle and modified at any time, for in‐
Furthermore, the manufacturer has product
stance:
monitoring duties to meet in line with product lia‐
bility law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle man‐ ▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐
ufacturer needs technical data from the vehicle. tions.
Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be ▷ Suspension and climate control settings.
reset when a dealer’s service center or another ▷ Individual settings, for instance lighting in the
car's interior.
12
Information NOTES
Control via mobile devices Data is exchanged over a secure connection,

Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile de‐ for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle
vices connected to the vehicle, for instance manufacturer intended for this purpose. Any col‐
smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle lection, processing, and use of personal data
control elements. The sound and picture from above and beyond that needed to provide the
the mobile device can be played back and dis‐ services must always be based on a legal per‐
played through the multimedia system. Certain mission, contractual arrangement or consent.
information is transferred to the mobile device at In addition, the vehicle manufacturer evaluates
the same time. Depending on the type of con‐ anonymized information on transport infrastruc‐
nection, this includes, for instance position data ture and how the infotainment system is used.
and other general vehicle information. This opti‐ This information cannot be traced back to indi‐
mizes the way in which selected apps, for in‐ vidual vehicles or people. Evaluating the data en‐
stance navigation or music playback, work. ables the manufacturer to further improve its
There is no further interaction between the mo‐ products or services, for instance by incorporat‐
bile device and the vehicle, for instance active ing the most up-to-date traffic bulletins. The data
access to vehicle data. How the data will be transfer feature can be deactivated in the vehicle.
processed further is determined by the provider Certain services and functions, some of which
of the particular app being used. The extent of are subject to a charge, can be deactivated by
the possible settings depends on the respective the driver. It is also possible to activate or deacti‐
app and the operating system of the mobile de‐ vate the data connection as a whole. That is, with
vice. the exception of functions and services required
by law such as Assist systems.
Services
Services from other providers
General information When using online services from other providers,
these services are the responsibility of the rele‐
If the vehicle has a wireless network connection,
vant provider and subject to their data privacy
this enables data to be exchanged between the
conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manu‐
vehicle and other systems. The wireless network
facturer has no influence on the content ex‐
connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmit‐
changed during this process. Information on the
ter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devi‐
way in which personal data is collected and used
ces brought into the vehicle, for instance smart‐
in relation to services from third parties, the
phones. This wireless network connection
scope of such data, and its purpose, can be ob‐
enables 'online functions' to be used. These in‐
tained from the relevant service provider.
clude online services and apps supplied by the
vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.
Event Data Recorder EDR
Services from the vehicle
manufacturer This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
Where online services from the vehicle manufac‐ corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
turer are concerned, the corresponding functions record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
are described in the appropriate place, for in‐ tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
stance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's road obstacle, data that will assist in understand‐
website. The relevant legal information pertaining ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
to data protection is provided there too. Personal EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
data may be used to perform online services.
13
NOTES Information
dynamics and safety systems for a short period

of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
Vehicle identification
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
number
such data as:
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were op‐
erating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better understand‐
The vehicle identification number can be found
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
in the engine compartment, on the right-hand
injuries occur.
side of the vehicle.
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
tions and no personal data, for instance name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the The vehicle identification number can be found
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu‐ on the type label, on the right-hand side of the
facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, vehicle.
that have the special equipment, can read the in‐
formation if they have access to the vehicle or
the EDR.
The vehicle identification number can also be

found behind the windshield.
It is also possible to display the vehicle identifica‐

tion number via iDrive, refer to page 57.
14
Information NOTES
Reporting safety defects

For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned and
operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐
tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in in‐
dividual problems between you, your dealer, or
BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-
related defect to Transport Canada, Defect In‐
vestigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free
hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
15
16
QUICK REFERENCE
Your BMW at a glance ............................................................................... 18
17
QUICK REFERENCE Your BMW at a glance
Your BMW at a glance

Opening and closing All vehicle access points are locked.
Buttons for the central locking

Buttons on the remote control system
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate Buttons for the central locking system.
With automatic tailgate operation: open the
tailgate Locking
4 Panic mode
Press the button with the front doors
closed.
Unlocking the vehicle
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Press button on the remote control.
Unlocking
Depending on the settings, either only the driv‐
Press button.
er's door or all vehicle access points are un‐
locked.
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the Panic mode
button of the remote control again to unlock the
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
other vehicle access points.
self in a dangerous situation.
Press and hold this button on the re‐
Press button on the remote control for
mote control after unlocking.
at least 3 seconds.
The windows and the glass sunroof are opened,
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
as long as the button on the remote control is
pressed.
Locking the vehicle

18
Your BMW at a glance QUICK REFERENCE
Comfort Access With automatic tailgate operation:

opening and closing the tailgate
Concept with no-touch activation
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control. Concept
All you need to do is to have the remote control The tailgate can be opened and closed with no-
with you, such as in your pants pocket. touch activation using the remote control you are
carrying.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the car's
Performing the foot movement
interior.
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐
Unlocking the vehicle prox. one arm's length away from the rear of
the vehicle.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction
of travel and immediately pull it back. With
this movement, the leg must pass through
the ranges of both sensors.
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front

passenger door completely.
Locking the vehicle
Tailgate
Opening
Touch the surface on the door handle of the driv‐

er's or front passenger door with your finger for
approx. 1 second without grasping the door han‐
dle.
▷ Unlock the vehicle and press the button on
the tailgate.
▷ If carrying the remote control, press the but‐
ton on the tailgate.
19
▷ Press button on the remote control 4 Backrest tilt

for approx. 1 second.
5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Depending on the setting, the doors may also
be unlocked.
Adjusting the head restraint
Closing
Height
▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the

tailgate. ▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
▷ Press button, arrow 2. ▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
The vehicle will be locked after closing the head restraint down.
tailgate. The driver's door must be closed for
this purpose and the remote control must be Adjusting the exterior mirrors
outside of the vehicle in the area of the tail‐
gate.
Seats, mirrors, and steering

wheel
Electrically adjustable seats
1 Settings
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
1 Memory function
2 Backrest width
3 Lumbar support
20
Adjusting the steering wheel While driving, the seat position adjustment on
the driver's side is interrupted after a short time.
Manual steering wheel adjustment
Displays and control
elements
In the vicinity of the steering
wheel
1. Fold the lever down.

2. Adjust the height and reach of the steering
wheel.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Memory function
1 Light switch element
Concept 2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn signal
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐ 3 Instrument cluster
essary, retrieved using the memory function:
4 Washer/wiper system
▷ Seat position.
5 Start/Stop button
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display.
Indicator/warning lights
Storing
Instrument cluster
1. Switch on the ignition.
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐
2. Set the desired position. ety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐
3. Press button. The LED in the button
tioning and light up temporarily when the engine
lights up.
is started or the ignition is switched on.
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED is
lit. The LED goes out.
Calling up settings
The stored position is called up automatically.
Press selected button 1 or 2.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat or one of the memory buttons is
pressed.
21
Driver's door Controller
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
1 Safety switch Press once: call up main menu.

2 Power windows Press twice: display all menu items of
3 Exterior mirrors the main menu.
4 Opening/closing the tailgate Open the Communication menu.
Switch console Open the Media/Radio menu.
Open destination input menu for navi‐

gation.
Open navigation map.
Press once: open the previous dis‐

play.
Press and hold: open the menus used
last.
1 Selector lever
2 Controller Open the Options menu.
3 Parking brake
4 Driver assistance systems
Voice activation
5 Driving Dynamics Control
Using the voice activation system
iDrive
Activating the voice activation system
Concept
1. Press button on the steering wheel.
The iDrive combines the functions of many
2. Wait for the signal.
switches. These functions can be operated via
the Controller and, depending on the equipment 3. Say the command.
version, the touchscreen. This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
If no other commands are possible, operate the
function via iDrive.
22
Terminating the voice activation system Starting/stopping the engine

Press the button on the steering wheel
or ›Cancel‹. Steptronic transmission: starting
1. Depress the brake pedal.
Help on the voice activation system 2. Press the Start/Stop button.
▷ To have information on the operating princi‐
Steptronic transmission: switching off
ple of the voice activation system read out
loud: ›Help with voice activation‹. 1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply the
parking brake.
▷ To have help for the current menu read out
loud: ›Help‹. 2. Engage selector lever position P.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Information on Emergency Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate Auto Start/Stop function
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, Steptronic transmission: switches the engine off
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can automatically while stationary to save fuel. The
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a engine starts automatically when the brake pedal
phone connection. is released.
Instead, use the SOS button close to the interior
mirror. Parking brake
Setting
Driving Pull the switch.
The LED and indicator light light up.
Starting and stopping the engine
Releasing
Ignition on/off With the ignition switched on:
▷ On: press the Start/Stop but‐ Steptronic transmission: press the switch
ton. while the brake is pressed or selector lever posi‐
Most of the indicator/warning tion P is set.
lights light up for a varied The LED and indicator light go out.
length of time. The parking brake is released.
▷ Off: press the Start/Stop button again.
All indicator lights go out. Steptronic transmission
▷ Radio-ready state: when the ignition is
switched off, press the ON/OFF button on Selector lever positions
the radio or when the engine is running, press Parking position P.
the Start/Stop button. Reverse R.
Some electronic systems/power consumers Neutral N.
remain ready for operation.
Drive mode D.
Engage selector lever position P or R only when
the vehicle is stationary.
23
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you High beams, headlight flasher,
select a drive mode or reverse, maintain pressure turn signal, roadside parking
on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.
light
Selector lever lock
High beams, headlight flasher
A lock prevents an inadvertent change from se‐
lector lever position P to another selector lever
position and, depending on the transmission ver‐
sion, inadvertent switching to selector lever posi‐
tion P or R.
To release the lock: with the brake pedal de‐
pressed, press the button on the front or side of
the selector lever.
Steptronic transmission, Sport

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
and manual mode
▷ High beams, arrow 1.
▷ Headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Turn signal
Sport program:
Press the selector lever to the left out of selector
lever position D.
Manual mode:
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ ▷ On: press the lever past the resistance point.
ward. ▷ Off: press the lever past the resistance point
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards. in the opposite direction.
▷ Off: lightly tap the lever to the resistance
point.
▷ Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the
lever up or down.
▷ Brief signaling: press the lever to the resist‐
ance point and hold it there for as long as you
want the turn signal to flash.
24
Canada: roadside parking light Washer/wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and

brief wipe
Switching on
Illuminate the vehicle on one side.

▷ On: with the ignition switched off, press the
lever either up or down past the resistance
point for approx. 2 seconds.
▷ Off: briefly press the lever to the resistance
point in the opposite direction. Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
▷ Resting position of the wipers: position 0.
Lights and lighting
▷ Rain sensor: position 1.
Light functions ▷ Normal wiper speed: position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Symbol Function
Front fog lights. Brief wipe and switching off
Automatic headlight control.

Cornering light.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Press the lever down.

Low beams. ▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
reaches its standard position.
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
Instrument lighting. standard position.
25
Rain sensor Rear window wiper
Activating/deactivating Switching on the rear window wiper
To activate: press the lever up once from its Turn the outer switch upward.
standard position, arrow 1. ▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0.
To deactivate: press the lever back into the ▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse
standard position. gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐
tinuous operation.
Clean the rear window

Turn the outer switch in the desired direction.
▷ In resting position: turn the switch downward,
arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to
its resting position when released.
▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch further,
Adjusting the sensitivity: its intermittent position when released.
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield and

headlights
Pull the lever.
26
Canada: wiper systemWiper Rain sensor

system
Activating/deactivating
Switching the wipers on/off and
brief wipe
Switching on
Press button on the wiper lever.
Adjusting the sensitivity
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
beyond the resistance point.
Brief wipe and switching off
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield and

headlights
Push wiper lever down.

▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Pull the wiper lever towards you.
27
Rear window wiper Button Function
Switching on the rear window wiper Air flow, manual.
Air distribution, manual.
Rear window defroster.
Seat heating.
Turn the outer switch upward.
▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0.
▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse Automatic climate control
gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐
tinuous operation. Button Function
Temperature.
Clean the rear window
its resting position when released. Air conditioning.
arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to Maximum cooling.
its intermittent position when released.
AUTO program.
Climate control
Recirculated-air mode/AUC.
Air conditioner
Air flow, manual.
Button Function
Air distribution, manual.
Temperature.
SYNC program.
Defrost and defog window.

Air conditioning.
Rear window defroster.
Recirculated-air mode
28
Button Function 3. "State/Province?"

4. Move the Controller to the right to select the
Seat heating.
state from the list.
Switch off the system. Entering the address

The address can be entered in any order.
Example: entering the address via the town/city
Infotainment 1. "City/Postal code?"
2. Enter the town/city.
Radio The list is narrowed down further with each
entry.
Control elements 3. Select the symbol.
4. Select a town/city from the list.
5. If necessary, enter the street.
6. Select the street as you would the town/city.
7. If necessary, enter a house number.
8. Select the symbol.
9. Select a house number or range of house
numbers from the list.
1 Waveband/satellite radio Starting destination guidance

2 Changing the entertainment source "Start guidance"
3 Sound output on/off, volume If only the town/city was entered: destination
4 Depending on the vehicle equipment: eject‐ guidance is started to the town/city center.
ing a CD/DVD
5 Depending on the vehicle equipment: Connecting a mobile phone
CD/DVD drive After the mobile phone is connected once to the
6 Change station/track vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using
7 Programmable memory buttons iDrive, the steering wheel buttons and spoken in‐
structions.
1. "My Vehicle"
Navigation destination entry
2. "iDrive settings"
Entering a destination via address 3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
State/province
5. Select the functions for which the mobile
1. "Navigation" phone is to be used.
2. "Enter address" The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
played on the Control Display.
29
6. To perform additional steps on the mobile If connection is to be set up via the additional
phone, refer to the mobile phone owner's phone:
manual: e.g., search for or connect the Blue‐
tooth device or a new device. 1. Press button.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears 2. "Call via"
on the mobile phone display. Select the Blue‐
tooth name of the vehicle.
Apple CarPlay preparation
7. Depending on the mobile device, a control
number is displayed or the control number Concept
must be entered.
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible
▷ Compare the control number displayed Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation
on the Control Display with the control and iDrive.
number on the display of the device.
Confirm the control number on the device Functional requirements
and on the Control Display.
▷ Compatible iPhone.
▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
ber on the device and via iDrive.
▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
The device is connected and displayed in the
device list. ▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are
switched on on the iPhone.
The mobile phone is connected and will appear
at the top of the list of mobile phones.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
Via iDrive:
Using the phone
1. "My Vehicle"
Accepting a call 2. "iDrive settings"
Incoming call can be accepted via iDrive or the 3. "Mobile devices"
button on the steering wheel.
4. "Settings"
Via iDrive 5. Select the following settings:
"Accept" ▷ "Bluetooth®"
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
Via the button on the steering wheel
Press button. Pairing iPhone with CarPlay
Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.
Dialing a number Select CarPlay as the function:
1. "Communication"
"Apple CarPlay"
2. "Dial number"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
3. Enter the numbers. played in the device list.
4. Select the symbol. The connection is es‐
tablished via the mobile phone to which this
function has been assigned.
30
Refueling Checking the tire inflation pressure

Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and
correct it as needed:
Refueling
▷ At least twice a month.
Fuel cap ▷ Before embarking on an extended trip.
1. Press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap to
open it. Electronic oil measurement
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
Requirements
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap. A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter trip,
the status of the last, sufficiently long trip is dis‐
Gasoline
played.
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Displaying the engine oil level
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without met‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
allic additives.
2. "Vehicle status"
Information on the recommended fuel grade can
be found in the Owner's Manual. 3. "Engine oil level"
Wheels and tires Adding engine oil
Tire inflation pressure specifications General information

Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehicle
before engine oil is added.
Adding
The tire inflation pressure values can be found

on the sign on the door pillar.
After correcting the tire inflation

Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
pressure played in the instrument cluster.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Observe the quantity to be added in the mes‐
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
sage.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Observe recommended engine oil types.
31
Providing assistance Warning triangle, first-aid kit
Warning triangle
Hazard warning flashers
The warning triangle is located on the inside of

The button is located in the center console. the tailgate. Move the warning triangle sideways
and remove it.
Breakdown assistance
First-aid kit
Roadside Assistance
The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area on
This service can be reached around the clock in the left in the storage compartment.
many countries.
ConnectedDrive
Roadside Assistance
Via iDrive: Concierge service
1. "ConnectedDrive" The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐
mation on events, gas stations or hotels, and
2. "BMW Assist"
provides phone numbers and addresses. Many
3. "BMW Roadside Assistance" hotels can be booked directly by the BMW Con‐
A voice connection is established with Road‐ cierge service. The Concierge service is part of
side Assistance. the optional BMW Assist Response Center.
1. "ConnectedDrive"
2. "Concierge"
Teleservices
Teleservices are services that help to maintain
vehicle mobility.
Depending on the equipment version, Teleservi‐
ces comprise the following services:
▷ Roadside Assistance.
▷ Service Request.
▷ Automatic Service Request.
▷ Teleservice Report.
32
▷ Teleservice Battery Guard.

▷ Your dealer’s service center.
33
34
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit ........................................................................................................ 36
iDrive ............................................................................................................ 40
Voice activation system ............................................................................ 49
General settings ......................................................................................... 52
Owner's Manual media ............................................................................. 64
35
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and It also describes features that are not necessarily
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected
options options or country versions. This also applies to
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ ing these functions and systems, the applicable
cific and optional features offered with the series. laws and regulations must be observed.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Rear window safety switch 88 Front fog lights 148

2 Power windows 87
3 Exterior mirror operation 99 Light switch 145
4 Central locking system
Unlock 75 Lights off
Daytime running lights 147
Lock 75 Parking lights 145
5 Lights Low beams 145
36
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
Automatic headlight control 146 10 Start/stop the engine and switch

Cornering light 147 the ignition on/off 108
High-beam Assistant 147 Auto Start/Stop function 109

Instrument lighting 148
11 Steering wheel buttons, right

6 Steering column stalk, left Entertainment source
Turn signal 113
Volume
High beams, headlight flasher 113
Voice activation 49
High-beam Assistant 147
Telephone, see Owner's Manual

Roadside parking lights 146 for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 8
Thumbwheel for selection lists 138
Onboard Computer 138
12 Horn, entire surface
7 Shift paddles 121
8 Instrument cluster 129 13 Heated steering wheel 101
9 Steering column stalk, right

Wiper 113 14 Adjust steering wheel 101
Wiper on Canadian models 117 15 Steering wheel buttons, left
Rain sensor 114 Cruise control on/off 183
Rain sensor on Canadian mod‐
els 118
Active Cruise Control on/off 177
Clean the windshield and head‐
lights 115
Cruise control: store speed
Rear window wiper in Canadian
models 119
Pausing, continuing cruise control
Rear window wiper 116
Camera-based cruise control: re‐

Clean the rear window 116 duce distance
Camera-based cruise control: in‐

crease distance
Cruise control rocker switch
37
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
16 Unlock hood 263 17 Open the tailgate 79
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 40 9 Parking brake 111

2 Ventilation 203 10 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
3 Hazard warning system 283 trol 171
Driving Dynamics Control 175

Intelligent Safety 160
PDC Park Distance Control 186
4 Radio/Multimedia Rearview camera 189
5 Glove compartment 218 Parking assistant 192
6 Climate control 197 HDC Hill Descent Control 173
7 Steptronic transmission selector lever 121

8 Controller with buttons 41
38
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1 Emergency Request, SOS 283 4 Reading lights 149
2 Glass sunroof 88 5 Interior lights 149
3 Indicator light, front-seat passenger

airbag 153
39
AT A GLANCE iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle features and Control elements
options
Overview
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features that are not necessarily
options or country versions. This also applies to
ing these functions and systems, the applicable
laws and regulations must be observed.
Concept 1 Control Display, with touchscreen depending

on the equipment version
The iDrive combines the functions of many 2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
switches. These functions can be operated via the equipment version, with touchpad
the Controller and, depending on the equipment
version, the touchscreen.
Control Display
Safety information General information

To clean the Control Display, follow the care in‐
structions, refer to page 292.
WARNING In the case of very high temperatures on the
Operating the integrated information systems Control Display, for instance due to intense solar
and communication devices while driving can radiation, the brightness may be reduced down
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control to complete deactivation. Once the temperature
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. is reduced, for instance through shade or air con‐
Only use the systems or devices when the traf‐ ditioning, the normal functions are restored.
fic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use
the systems and devices while the vehicle is Safety information
stationary.
NOTE
Objects in the area in the front of the Control
Display can shift and damage the Control Dis‐
play. There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not place objects in the area in front of the
Control Display.
40
iDrive AT A GLANCE
Switching on/off automatically

The Control Display is switched on automatically
after unlocking.
In certain situations, the Control Display is
switched off automatically, for instance if no op‐
eration is performed on the vehicle for several
minutes.
Switching on/off manually

▷ Move in four directions.
The Control Display can also be switched off
manually.
1. Press button.
2. "Turn off control display"
Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐
troller to switch it back on again.
Controller with navigation

system
Buttons on the Controller
General information
Button Function
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select Press once: call up main menu.
menu items and enter the settings. Press twice: display all menu items of
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the the main menu.
touchpad on the Controller, refer to page 45.
Open the Communication menu.
Operation
Open the Media/Radio menu.
▷ Turn.
Open destination input menu for navi‐

gation.
Open navigation map.

play.
last.
▷ Press.
Open the Options menu.
41
AT A GLANCE iDrive
Controller without navigation Buttons on the Controller

system
Button Function
General information Press once: call up main menu.
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐ Press twice: display all menu items of
rectly. The Controller can be used to select the main menu.
menu items and enter the settings.
Open the Communication menu.
Operation
▷ Turn. Open the Media/Radio menu.

play.
last.
Open the Options menu.
▷ Press. Operating with the

Controller
Opening the main menu
Press button.
▷ Move in two directions.
The main menu is displayed.

All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Adapting the main menu
1. Press the button twice.
42
iDrive AT A GLANCE
All menu items of the main menu are dis‐ Opening recently used menus
played.
The recently used menus can be displayed.
2. Select a menu item.
Press and hold this button.
3. To move the menu item to the desired posi‐
tion, tilt the Controller to the right or left.
Opening the Options menu
Selecting menu items
Press button.
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu The "Options" menu is displayed.
item is highlighted.
The Options menu consists of various areas:
▷ Screen settings, for instance "Split screen".
▷ Control options for the selected main menu,
for instance for "Media/Radio".
▷ If applicable, further operating options for the
selected menu, for instance "Save station".
Changing settings
1. Select a field.
2. Press the Controller. 2. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
displayed.
Menu items in the Owner's 3. Press the Controller.
Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be Activating/deactivating the
selected are set in quotation marks, for instance functions
"iDrive settings".
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
Changing between displays tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
After a menu item is selected, for instance menu item activates or deactivates the function.
"iDrive settings", a new display appears. Function is activated.
▷ Move the Controller to the left. Function is deactivated.
Closes the current display and shows the
previous display. Entering letters and numbers
▷ Press button. General information
The previous display opens. Letters and numbers can be entered via the
▷ Move the Controller to the right. Controller.
New display is opened. The keyboard's display changes automatically.
A white arrow indicates that additional displays
can be called up. Input
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or numbers.
43
AT A GLANCE iDrive
2. : confirm entry. The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐

played.
Symbol Function
Press the Controller: delete letters or Operating via touchscreen

number.
Hold the Controller down: delete all General information

letters or numbers.
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐
screen.
Switching between upper/lower Touch screen with your fingers. Do not use any
case, numbers and characters objects.
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters and Opening the main menu
numbers.
Tap on symbol.
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or Change between capital and

lower-case letters.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the choice
The main menu is displayed.
is narrowed down with every letter entered and
letters may be added automatically. All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
Adapting the main menu
▷ Only those letters are offered during entry for
which data is available. 1. Tap on symbol.
▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐ All menu items of the main menu are dis‐
tered in all languages that are available in played.
iDrive. 2. Drag the menu item to the desired position
on the right or left.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries, Selecting menu items
the letters for which there is an entry are dis‐ Tap desired menu item.
played at the left edge.
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.

All letters for which there are entries are dis‐
played on the left edge.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
44
iDrive AT A GLANCE
Entering letters and numbers
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
Controller or the touchscreen.
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
Symbol Function
Tapping the symbol: delete the letter

Menu items in the Owner's or number.
Manual Tapping and holding the symbol for
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be an extended period: delete all letters
selected are set in quotation marks, for instance or numbers.
"iDrive settings".
Switching between upper/lower
Changing between displays case, numbers and characters
After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens. Symbol Function
A white arrow indicates that additional displays Enter the letters.
can be called up.
Enter the numbers.
▷ Swipe to the left.
▷ Tap on symbol. or Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
New display is opened.
Changing settings Operating navigation map

Settings such as volumes can be changed via The navigation map can be moved with the
the touchscreen. touchscreen.
▷ Slide in the selected field to the right or left, Function Operation
until the desired setting is displayed.
Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the fin‐
▷ , Tap on symbol. map. gers.
Activating/deactivating the
functions Touchpad
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
General information
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the function. Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
touchpad on the Controller.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
45
AT A GLANCE iDrive
Selecting functions Function Operation

1. "My Vehicle"
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐
2. "iDrive settings" rection.
3. "Touchpad"
Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out on the touch‐
4. Select desired setting: map. pad with fingers.
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
Display menu. Tap once.
▷ "Map": using the map.
▷ "Search fields": write letters without se‐
lecting the list field. Split screen
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
letters and numbers. General information
Additional information can be displayed in several
Entering letters and numbers menus on the right side of the split screen, for in‐
Entering letters requires some practice at the be‐ stance information from the Onboard Computer.
ginning. When entering, pay attention to the fol‐
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
lowing:
screen, this information remains visible even
▷ The system distinguishes between upper when switching to another menu.
and lower-case letters and numbers. To
make entries, it may be necessary to change Switching the split screen on/off
between upper and lower-case letters, num‐
bers and characters, refer to page 43. 1. Press button.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the 2. "Split screen"
Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such as Selecting the display
accents or periods so that the letter can be
The display can be selected in menus, where the
clearly recognized. The set language deter‐
split screen is supported.
mines what input is possible. Where neces‐
sary, enter special characters via the Control‐ 1. Move the Controller to the right until the split
ler. screen is selected.
▷ To delete a character, swipe to the left on the 2. Press the Controller.
touchpad. 3. Select the desired setting.
▷ To enter a blank space, swipe to the right in
the center of the touchpad. Specifying the number of
▷ To enter a hyphen, swipe to the right in the displays
upper area of the touchpad.
It is possible to specify the number of displays.
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right in
the lower area of the touchpad. 1. Move the Controller to the right until the split
screen is selected.
Using the map 2. Press the Controller.
The map in the navigation system can be moved 3. "Personalize menu"
via the touchpad.
46
iDrive AT A GLANCE
4. Select the desired setting. Entertainment

5. Move the Controller to the left.
Symbol Meaning
CD/DVD player.
Status information
Bluetooth audio.
General information USB audio interface.
The status field can be found in the upper area of
Online Entertainment.
the Control Display. Status information is dis‐
played in the form of symbols. WiFi.
Status field symbols Additional symbols
Radio Symbol Meaning
Symbol Meaning Check Control message.
HD Radio station is being received. The sound output has been

switched off.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Encrypted connection not active.
Telephone Request for the current vehicle posi‐

tion.
Symbol Meaning Checking the current vehicle posi‐
Incoming or outgoing call. tion.
Missed call.
Signal strength of cellular network. Programmable memory

Network search. buttons
Cellular network is not available.
General information
The critical charge state of the mo‐
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
bile phone has been reached.
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
Roaming is active. rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation des‐
tinations, phone numbers and menu entries.
SMS text message received.
Settings are stored for the driver profile currently
Message received. used.
Reminder.
Storing a function
Sending not possible. 1. Select function via iDrive.
Contacts are loaded.
2. Press and hold the desired button
until a signal sounds.
47
AT A GLANCE iDrive
Running a function
Press button.
The function will work immediately. This means,

for instance that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment

Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or
use objects.
The button assignment is displayed at the top
edge of screen.
Deleting the button assignments

1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for ap‐
prox. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
48
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
Voice activation system

Vehicle features and Requirements
options Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system so
that the spoken commands can be identified.
It also describes features that are not necessarily To set the language, refer to page 52.
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ Using the voice activation
ing these functions and systems, the applicable system
Activating the voice activation

Concept system
Most functions displayed on the Control Display 1. Press button on the steering wheel.
can be operated by voice commands via the 2. Wait for the signal.
voice activation system. The system supports
3. Say the command.
you with announcements during input.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
General information If no other commands are possible, operate the
function via iDrive.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the ve‐
hicle is stationary can only be operated via Terminating the voice activation
the voice activation system to a limited ex‐ system
tent.
Press the button on the steering wheel
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
or ›Cancel‹.
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal in‐
structions to use with the voice activation Using a smartphone via voice
system. activation
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters A smartphone connected to the vehicle can be
smoothly and with normal volume, emphasis, used via voice activation.
and speed. Activate voice command response on the smart‐
▷ Always say commands in the language of the phone for this purpose.
voice activation system.
1. Press and hold the button on the
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
49
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
Voice command response is activated on the

smartphone.
Example: opening the tone
settings
2. Release the button.
The commands of the menu items are spoken
If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐
just as they are selected via the Controller.
pears on the Control Display.
If it was not possible to activate voice command 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output, if
response, the list of Bluetooth devices appears needed.
on the Control Display.
2. Press button on the steering wheel.
3. ›Media and radio‹
Possible commands 4. ›Tone‹
General information
Most menu items on the Control Display can be Settings
voiced as commands.
Commands from other menus can also be spo‐ Setting the voice dialog
ken. You can set the system to use standard dialog or
You may select list entries such as phone list en‐ a short version.
tries via voice activation. Read these list entries The short version of the voice dialog plays back
out loud exactly as they are shown in the respec‐ short messages in abbreviated form.
tive list.
Via iDrive:
Displaying possible commands 1. "My Vehicle"

The following is displayed in the top area of the 2. "iDrive settings"
Control Display: 3. "Language"
▷ Some possible commands for the current 4. "Speech mode:"
menu.
5. Select the desired setting.
▷ Some possible commands from other me‐
nus. Selecting the input language
▷ Status of the voice recognition. For some languages, the input language can be
▷ Encrypted connection is not available. selected.
Via iDrive:
Help on the voice activation
1. "My Vehicle"
system
▷ To have information on the operating princi‐
ple of the voice activation system read out 3. "Language"
loud: ›Help with voice activation‹. 4. "Voice control:"
▷ To have help for the current menu read out 5. Select the desired setting.
loud: ›Help‹.
50
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
Activating voice recognition via

the server
The voice recognition feature via the server pro‐
vides a dictation function and a natural method of
entering destinations while improving the quality
of voice recognition. To use the functions, data is
transmitted to a service provider and locally
stored there.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Language"
4. "Server speech recognition"
Adjusting the volume

Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the vol‐
ume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Information on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a
phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 283,
close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof
closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
51
AT A GLANCE General settings
General settings
Vehicle features and 4. "Time zone:"
options
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
It also describes features that are not necessarily Setting the time
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
ing these functions and systems, the applicable 2. "iDrive settings"
laws and regulations must be observed. 3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
Language 5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are
displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
Setting the language
7. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes
Via iDrive:
are displayed.
1. "My Vehicle" 8. Press the Controller.
3. "Language" Setting the time format
4. "Language:" Via iDrive:
5. Select the desired setting. 1. "My Vehicle"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 2. "iDrive settings"
rently used.
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time format:"
Setting the voice dialog
Voice dialog for the voice activation system, refer
to page 50. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Time Automatic time setting

Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
Setting the time zone the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Date and time"
52
General settings AT A GLANCE
3. "Date and time" 3. "Units"

4. "Automatic time setting" 4. Select the desired menu item.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 5. Select the desired setting.
rently used. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Date
Setting the date display of the current
Via iDrive:
vehicle position
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings" Concept
3. "Date and time" If vehicle location has been activated, the current
4. "Date:" vehicle position can be displayed in the BMW
Connected app or in the ConnectedDrive cus‐
5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
tomer portal.
displayed.
Activating/deactivating
7. Make the settings for the month and year.
Via iDrive:
Setting the date format 1. "My Vehicle"

Via iDrive: 2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Vehicle tracking"
1. "My Vehicle"
4. "Vehicle tracking"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date format:" Activating/deactivating
5. Select the desired setting. popup windows
rently used. For some functions, popup windows are dis‐
played automatically on the Control Display.
Some of these popup windows can be activated
Setting the units of or deactivated.
measurement Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
You can set the units of measurement for some
values, for example, fuel consumption, distances
and temperature. 3. "Pop-ups"
Via iDrive: 4. Select the desired setting.
1. "My Vehicle"
rently used.
53
Control Display 3. Select the desired menu and the desired

content.
Brightness rently used.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
Messages
3. "Displays"
Concept
4. "Control display"
The menu centrally displays all messages arriv‐
5. "Brightness" ing in the vehicle in list form.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set. General information
7. Press the Controller. The following messages can be displayed:
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ ▷ Traffic messages.
rently used. ▷ Check Control messages.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ ▷ Communication messages, for example e-
ness settings may not be clearly visible. mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
▷ Service requirements messages.
Screensaver
Messages are additionally displayed in the status
If no settings are made via iDrive, a screensaver
field.
will be displayed after an adjustable time.
Via iDrive: Retrieving messages
1. "My Vehicle" Via iDrive:
2. "iDrive settings" 1. "Notifications"
3. "Displays" 2. Select the desired message.
4. "Control display" The respective menu is opened, where the mes‐
5. "Screensaver" sage is displayed.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ Deleting messages
rently used. All messages, except Check Control messages,
can be deleted from the list. Check Control mes‐
Selecting the contents of the sages are displayed as long as they are relevant.
main menu Via iDrive:
For some menu items of the main menu, the dis‐ 1. "Notifications"
played contents can be selected.
2. Select the desired message.
1. Press button. 3. Press button.

2. "Contents of main menu" 4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all
notifications"
54
Settings Deleting personal data in the

The following settings can be adjusted: vehicle
▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐
sages will be permitted. Concept
▷ Sort the messages according to date or prior‐ Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores per‐
ity. sonal data, such as stored radio stations. This
personal data can be permanently deleted using
Via iDrive:
iDrive.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings" General information
3. "Notifications" Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
▷ Driver profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
Data protection ▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.
▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information.
Data transfer ▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destinations.
Concept
▷ Phone book.
The vehicle offers different functions, whose use
requires a data transfer to BMW or a service pro‐ ▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies.
vider. The data transfer can be deactivated for ▷ Office data, for instance voice notes.
some functions. ▷ Login accounts.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
General information
to 15 minutes.
With data transfer deactivated, the respective
function cannot be used.
Functional requirement
Only make these settings while stationary. Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Activating/deactivating the data Deleting data

transfer
Heed and follow the instructions on the Control
Follow the instructions on the Control Display. Display.
Via iDrive: Via iDrive:
1. Switch on the ignition. 1. Switch on the ignition.
2. "My Vehicle" 2. "My Vehicle"
3. "iDrive settings" 3. "iDrive settings"
4. "Data privacy" 4. "Data privacy"
5. Select the desired setting. 5. "Delete personal data"
6. "Delete personal data"
55
7. "OK" Function Connec‐

8. Exit and lock the vehicle. tion type
After 15 minutes, the deletion process is com‐ USB storage device: USB.
pleted.
Exporting and importing driver
If not all of the data was deleted, repeat the dele‐ profiles.
tion.
Performing software updates.
Canceling deletion Exporting and importing stored
trips.
Start the engine to cancel deletion of the data.
Playing music.
Playing videos from the smart‐ USB.

Connections phone or the USB storage de‐
vice.
Concept Using the vehicle Internet ac‐ Internet hot‐
Various connection types are available for using cess. spot.
mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection
type to select depends on the mobile device and Use Apple Carplay apps via Bluetooth
the desired function. iDrive and voice operation. and WiFi.
General information The following connection types require one-time

pairing with the vehicle:
The following overview shows possible functions
and the suitable connection types for them. The ▷ Bluetooth.
scope of functions depends on the mobile de‐ ▷ Internet hotspot.
vice. ▷ Apple CarPlay.
Function Connec‐ Paired devices are automatically recognized later
tion type on and connected to the vehicle.
Making calls via the hands-free Bluetooth.
system. Safety information
Using phone functions via iDrive.
Using the smartphone Office WARNING
functions. Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
Playing music from the smart‐ Bluetooth or
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
phone or the audio player. USB.
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Using compatible apps via Bluetooth or Only use the systems or devices when the traf‐
iDrive. USB. fic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use
the systems and devices while the vehicle is
stationary.
56
Compatible devices Switching on Bluetooth

Via iDrive:
General information
1. "My Vehicle"
Information on mobile devices compatible with
the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/ 2. "iDrive settings"
bluetooth. 3. "Mobile devices"
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed 4. "Settings"
or deviating software versions. 5. "Bluetooth®"
Displaying the vehicle identification Activating/deactivating telephone

number and software part number functions
When looking for compatible devices, you may To use all supported functions of a mobile
have to state the vehicle identification number phone, the following functions must be activated
and the software part number. These numbers prior to pairing.
can be displayed in the vehicle.
Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Mobile devices"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
4. "Settings"
5. Select desired setting:
5. "Bluetooth® info"
▷ "Office"
6. "System information"
Activate function to transmit short mes‐
A software update, refer to page 62, can be sages, e-mails, calendars, tasks, notes,
performed, if needed. and reminders to the vehicle. Costs can
be incurred by transmitting all data to the
Bluetooth connection vehicle.
▷ "Contact images"
Functional requirements Activate function to show the contact pic‐
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 57, with tures.
Bluetooth interface.
6. Move the Controller to the left.
▷ The remote control is in the vehicle.
▷ The device is ready for operation. Pairing the mobile device with the
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the device and in vehicle
the vehicle, refer to page 57. Via iDrive:
▷ Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may 1. "My Vehicle"
be required on the device; refer to the own‐
er's manual of the device. 2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
5. Select the functions for which the device will
be used:
57
▷ "Telephone" ▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode or

▷ "Bluetooth® audio" has only a limited remaining battery life.
▷ "Apps" Charge mobile phone.
▷ "Apple CarPlay" Why does the mobile phone no longer react?

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐ ▷ The applications on the mobile phone do not
played on the Control Display. function anymore.
6. Search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity of Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
the mobile device. ▷ Too high or too low ambient temperatures for
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears mobile phone operation.
on the mobile device display. Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle. ambient temperatures.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a control Why can phone functions not be used via iDrive?
number is displayed or the control number ▷ The mobile phone may not be properly con‐
must be entered. figured, for instance as Bluetooth audio de‐
▷ Compare the control number displayed vice.
on the Control Display with the control Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
number on the display of the device. phone or additional phone function.
Confirm the control number on the device Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐
and on the Control Display. played or why are they incomplete?
▷ Enter and confirm the same control num‐ ▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
ber on the device and via iDrive. not yet complete.
The device is connected and displayed in the ▷ It is possible that only the phone book entries
device list, refer to page 61. of the mobile phone or the SIM card are
If connection was not successful: Frequently transmitted.
Asked Questions, refer to page 58. ▷ It may not be possible to display phone book
entries with special characters.
Frequently asked questions ▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts
All requirements are met and all required steps from social networks.
were completed in the specified order. Despite ▷ The number of phone book entries to be
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐ stored is too high.
pected.
▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for in‐
In this case, the following explanations can help: stance due to stored information such as
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or notes.
connected? Reduce the data volume of the contact.
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con‐ ▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as
nected to the mobile phone or vehicle. audio source or as telephone.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections Configure the mobile phone and connect it
with other devices. with the telephone or additional phone func‐
Delete all known Bluetooth connections from tion.
the device list on the mobile phone and start How can the phone connection quality be im‐
a new device search. proved?
58
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the ▷ Protect the USB storage device against me‐
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending on chanical damage.
the mobile phone. ▷ Due to the large number of USB media avail‐
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in able on the market, it cannot be guaranteed
adapter or place it in the area of the center that every device is operable on the vehicle.
console. ▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐
▷ Insert mobile phone into the wireless charg‐ ronmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
ing tray. peratures; refer to the owner's manual of the
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and device.
loudspeakers separately. ▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐
If all points in this list have been checked and the niques, proper playback of the media stored
required function is still not available, contact the on the USB storage device cannot be guar‐
hotline, a dealer’s service center or another quali‐ anteed in all cases.
fied service center or repair shop. ▷ A connected USB storage device will be sup‐
plied with charging current via the USB inter‐
USB connection face if the device supports this.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored
General information data, do not charge a USB storage device via
Mobile devices with a USB port are connected to the onboard socket, when it is connected to
the USB interface. the USB interface.
▷ Mobile phones. ▷ Depending on how the USB storage device is

being used, settings may be required on the
The snap-in adapter features a separate USB
USB storage device, refer to the owner's
port that is automatically connected when a
manual of the device.
compatible mobile phone is inserted.
Not compatible USB media:
▷ Audio devices with USB port, for instance
MP3 player. ▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB storage devices. ▷ USB hubs.
Common file systems are supported. FAT32 ▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
and exFAT are the recommended formats. serts.
The following applications are possible: ▷ HFS-formatted USB media.
▷ Exporting and importing driver profiles, refer ▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
to page 82.
▷ Playing music files via USB audio.
Compatible device, refer to page 57, with USB
▷ Playing videos via USB video.
interface.
▷ Loading of software updates, refer to
page 62. Connecting the device
Follow the following when connecting: Connect the USB storage device using a suitable
▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐ adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to
tor into the USB interface. page 212.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable. The USB storage device is displayed in the de‐
vice list, refer to page 61.
59
Internet connection With the first Internet usage via the Internet hot‐
spot, data volume must be purchased from a
General information service provider.
Up to 8 devices can be connected with the Inter‐ All devices connected via the Internet hotspot
net hotspot. use this data volume.
If necessary, data volume can be purchased from
Functional requirements the ConnectedDrive Store.
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 57, with
WiFi interface. Settings
▷ ConnectedDrive contract. The network name and hotspot code can be
changed. In addition, the network name can be
▷ Data contract with a service provider.
hidden so that it cannot be found by other devi‐
▷ WiFi activated on the device. ces.
▷ Internet hotspot activated in the vehicle. Via iDrive:
▷ The ignition is switched on.
1. "My Vehicle"
Activating the Internet hotspot 2. "iDrive settings"
Via iDrive: 3. "Mobile devices"
1. "My Vehicle" 4. Press button.

2. "iDrive settings" 5. ▷ "Change hotspot key"
3. "Mobile devices" Enter the desired hotspot code.
4. "Settings" ▷ "Change hotspot name"
5. "Internet hotspot" Enter the desired network name.
▷ "Hide hotspot"
Connecting device with Internet
Activate or deactivate the function.
hotspot
6. Confirm the entry of the hotspot code or net‐
Via iDrive:
work name:
1. "My Vehicle" Select the symbol.
3. "Mobile devices" Apple CarPlay preparation
Concept
5. "Internet hotspot"
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation
and iDrive.
6. Search for WiFi networks on the device. Se‐
lect network name on the device. Functional requirements
7. Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐ ▷ Compatible iPhone, refer to page 57.
nect.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
60
▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are ▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.
switched on on the iPhone. If the steps listed have been carried out and the
required function is still not available: contact the
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay hotline, a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
Via iDrive: fied service center or repair shop.
1. "My Vehicle"
Managing mobile devices
3. "Mobile devices" General information
4. "Settings" ▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are auto‐
5. Select the following settings: matically recognized and reconnected when
the ignition is switched on.
▷ "Bluetooth®"
▷ The data stored on the SIM card or in the
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle
after recognition.
Pairing iPhone with CarPlay
▷ For some devices, certain settings may be
Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle, refer
necessary, for instance authorization, see
to page 57.
owner's manual of the device.
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay" Displaying the device list
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐ All devices paired or connected with the vehicle
played in the device list, refer to page 61. are displayed in the device list.
Via iDrive:
Operation
1. "My Vehicle"
For more information, see the Integrated Own‐
er's Manual, Online Owner's Manual, BMW Driv‐ 2. "iDrive settings"
er's Guide app or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐ 3. "Mobile devices"
gation, Entertainment, and Communication. A symbol indicates, for which function a device is
used.
Frequently asked questions
Symbol Function
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite "Telephone"
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
"Additional telephone"
pected.
In this case, the following explanations can help: "Bluetooth® audio"
The iPhone has already been paired with Apple "Apps"
CarPlay. When a new connection is established,
CarPlay can no longer be selected. "Internet hotspot"
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device "Apple CarPlay"
list.
▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned
from the list of stored vehicles under Blue‐
tooth and under WiFi.
61
Configuring the device Deleting the device

Functions can be activated or deactivated for Via iDrive:
paired and connected devices.
1. "My Vehicle"
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" 3. "Mobile devices"
2. "iDrive settings" 4. Select device.
3. "Mobile devices" 5. "Delete device"
4. Select the desired device. The device is disconnected and removed from
5. Select the desired setting. the device list.
If a function is assigned to a device, the function
will be deactivated where appropriate for a de‐ Swapping the telephone and
vice that is already connected and the device will additional phone
be disconnected. If two mobile phones are connected to the vehi‐
cle, the functions of the phone and additional
Disconnecting the device phone can be switched.
The connection of the device to the vehicle is Via iDrive:
disconnected.
1. "My Vehicle"
The device remains paired and can be con‐
nected again, refer to page 62. 2. "iDrive settings"
Via iDrive: 3. "Mobile devices"

4. "Settings"
1. "My Vehicle"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."
3. "Mobile devices" Software update
4. Select device.
5. "Disconnect device" General information
The vehicle supports a large number of mobile
Connecting the device devices, for instance mobile phones and MP3
A disconnected device can be reconnected. players. Software updates are available for many
of the supported devices. The vehicle is main‐
Via iDrive:
tained up-to-date via regular vehicle software up‐
1. "My Vehicle" dates.
2. "iDrive settings" Updates and related current information is availa‐
3. "Mobile devices" ble at www.bmw.com/update.
4. Select device.
Displaying the installed software
5. "Connect device" version
The functions that were assigned to the device The software version installed in the vehicle is
before disconnecting are assigned to the device displayed.
when it is reconnected. If the device is already
connected, these functions are deactivated.
62
Via iDrive: 5. ▷ "Previous version"
1. "My Vehicle" The previous software version is restored.
2. "iDrive settings" ▷ "Default software settings"
3. "Software update" The first software version is restored.
4. "Show current version" 6. "Remove software"

If an update has been carried out before, select 7. "OK"
the desired version to display additional informa‐ 8. Wait for restore.
tion. 9. Confirm system restart.
Updating software via USB

The software may only be updated when the ve‐
hicle is stationary.
Via iDrive:
1. Store the file for the software update in the

main directory of a USB flash drive.
2. Connect the USB storage device to a USB
interface, refer to page 212.
3. "My Vehicle"
5. "Software update"
6. "Update software"
7. "USB"
8. "Install software"
9. "OK"
10. Wait for the update to complete.
11. Confirm system restart.
Restoring the software version

The software version before the last software
update and the version before the first software
update can be restored.
The software may only be restored when the ve‐
hicle is stationary.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
63
AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media
Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and Supplementary Owner's Manuals
options Also follow the instructions of the Supplementary
Owner's Manuals, which are included in addition
to the onboard literature.
Integrated Owner's Manual
options or country versions. This also applies to in the vehicle
Concept
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐
scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐
General information cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
You can use various media formats to call up the
content in the Owner's Manual. The following Selecting the Owner's Manual
Owner's Manual media formats are available:
▷ Printed Owner's Manual, refer to page 64. 1. Press button.
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle, re‐ 2. "My Vehicle"

fer to page 64. 3. "Owner's Manual"
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app, refer to page 65. 4. Select the required method of accessing the
▷ Online Owner's Manual, refer to page 66. contents.
There are different features, refer to page 67,

in each of the different media formats.
Scrolling through the owner's
manual
Turn the Controller, until the next or previous
Printed Owner's Manual contents are displayed.
Concept Context help

The printed Owner's Manual describes all stand‐
ard, country-specific, and optional features of‐
General information
fered with the series. The section of the Owner's Manual relating to
the function that is currently selected can be dis‐
General information played directly.
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐

ment, and Communication can be obtained as
printed book from the service center.
64
Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE
Opening via iDrive Storing

Change directly to the Options menu from the 1. Select the desired entry point via iDrive:
function on the Control Display: ▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
1. Press button.
▷ "Keyword search"
2. "Owner's Manual"
▷ "Animations"
Opening when a Check Control 2. Press desired programmable mem‐

message is displayed ory button and hold for more than 2 seconds.
Directly from the Check Control message on the
Control Display: Executing
"Owner's Manual" Press the corresponding button.
The owner's manual is directly dis‐
Changing between a function and
played at the selected entry point.
the Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, for instance radio, to
the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and
to alternate between the two displays:
BMW Driver's Guide app
1. Press button. Concept

2. "Owner's Manual" The BMW Driver's Guide app specifically de‐
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
cle.
Manual.
The app can be displayed on smartphones and
4. Press button again to return to last dis‐ tablets.
played function.
General information
5. Press button to return to the page of The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
the Owner's Manual displayed last. tries as an app. Additional information on the In‐
To alternate continuously between the last dis‐ ternet:
played function and the last displayed page of www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. Opens Entering the vehicle identification number filters
a new display every time. the contents.
Programmable memory buttons Vehicles

It is possible to store Owner's Manuals for vari‐
General information
ous vehicles in the app.
The jumps into the Owner's Manual can be
It is also possible to test the app using a demon‐
stored on the programmable memory buttons,
stration vehicle.
refer to page 47, and called up directly.
65
AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media
Operating systems and language Additional information on availability, refer to

page 67.
The app is available for the iOS and Android op‐
erating systems.
Quick Reference Guide
The Owner's Manual is downloaded in the lan‐
guage of the device. The Quick Reference Guide provides information
on how to operate the vehicle, how to use basic
vehicle functions and what to do in case of a
Online Owner's Manual breakdown.
Search by illustrations
Concept
Based on illustrations, image search provides in‐
The Online Owner's Manual specifically de‐
formation and descriptions. This is helpful when
the terminology for a feature is not at hand.
cle.
The Online Owner's Manual can be displayed in Frequently asked questions
any of today's browsers.
This chapter provides answers to frequently
asked questions about your vehicle and helpful
General information links to additional information.
The Online Owner's Manual is available in many
countries. An account on the customer portal Quick links
may be required.
The chapter on quick links explains the most im‐
Entering the vehicle identification number filters portant information and operating instructions on
the contents. the basis of various situations.
Vehicles Smart Scan

It is possible to store several individual Owner's You can use Smart Scan to scan various symbols
Manuals for various vehicles. in the vehicle. After a brief explanation of the
symbol in question appears, it is then possible to
Language display the chapter directly.
The language is based on whichever language is Smart Scan is only available for the iOS operat‐
set in the operating system. ing system.
Printing Keyword search

You can use the print function for automatically You can use keywords to search for information
formatting and printing out individual chapters. and descriptions in the media.
Media components
General information
The following components are not available to
the same extent in all media formats.
66
Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE
Key features
Printed Integrated APP Online
All equipment included. X — — —
Equipment included in vehicle. — X X X
Quick Reference Guide. X X X X
Search by illustrations. — X X X
Frequently asked questions. — — X X
Quick links. — — X X
Smart Scan. — — X —
Keyword search. X X X X
X: included.
—: not included.
67
68
CONTROLS
Opening and closing ................................................................................. 70
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ......................................................... 91
Transporting children safely .................................................................. 102
Driving ....................................................................................................... 107
Displays ..................................................................................................... 129
Lights ......................................................................................................... 145
Safety ........................................................................................................ 150
Driving stability control systems ........................................................... 171
Driving comfort ........................................................................................ 177
Climate control ......................................................................................... 197
Interior equipment ................................................................................... 206
Storage compartments .......................................................................... 217
69
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle features and
WARNING
options Unlocking from the inside is only possible with
special knowledge.
cific and optional features offered with the series. Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
It also describes features that are not necessarily cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
options or country versions. This also applies to the vehicle from the outside when there are
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ people in it.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can cause the
Remote control vehicle to move and endanger themselves and
traffic, for instance due to the following actions:
General information ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
with integrated key.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
Each remote control contains a replaceable bat‐ dows.
tery. Replacing the battery, refer to page 72.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
You may set the button functions, depending on
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
the vehicle equipment and country version. Set‐
tings, refer to page 84. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
The vehicle stores personal settings for every re‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
mote control. Driver profile, refer to page 82.
exiting and lock the vehicle.
The remote controls hold information about re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the remote
control, refer to page 271. Overview
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
remote control with you so that the vehicle can
be opened from the outside. 1 Unlocking
2 Locking
70
Opening and closing CONTROLS
3 Unlocking the tailgate Pressing and holding the button on the remote
control opens the windows and the glass sun‐
With automatic tailgate operation: open the
roof.
tailgate
4 Panic mode Locking
1. Close the driver's door.
Unlocking
2. Press button on the remote control.
The following functions are executed:
Depending on the settings, refer to page 84, ▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
the following access points are unlocked: are locked.
▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap. ▷ Locking is confirmed by the turn signals and
Press the button of the remote control again the horn. This function must be activated in
to unlock the other vehicle access points. the settings, refer to page 84.
▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap. ▷ The alarm system, refer to page 85, is
switched on.
In addition, the following functions are executed:
If the engine or ignition is still switched on when
▷ Unlocking is confirmed by the turn signals
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks
and the horn. This function must be activated
twice. In this case, the engine or ignition must be
in the settings, refer to page 84.
switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.
▷ The settings stored in the driver profile, refer
to page 82, are applied. With Comfort Access:
▷ The driver's seat is set to the last position convenient closing
saved in the driver's profile. This function
must be activated in the settings, refer to Safety information
page 84.
▷ The interior lights, refer to page 149, are
WARNING
switched on, unless they were manually
switched off. With convenient closing, body parts can be
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
▷ Depending on the settings, the welcome light
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
and headlight courtesy delay feature, refer to
during convenient closing.
page 146, are switched on.
▷ Exterior mirrors folded through convenient
closing are folded open. Closing
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 85, is Press and hold this button on the remote
switched off. control in the area close to the vehicle.
The light functions may depend on the ambient
brightness. The windows and the glass sunroof are closed,
as long as the button on the remote control is
Convenient opening pressed.
The exterior mirrors are folded in.
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking. The exterior mirrors are not folded in when the
hazard warning flashers are switched on.
71
Switching on interior lights and

courtesy light NOTE
The tailgate swings back and up when it opens.
Press button on the remote control with
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
the vehicle locked.
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
This function is not available, if the interior lights is clear during opening and closing.
were switched off manually.
The light functions may depend on the ambient
brightness. NOTE
After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the rear
the button again. window and heat conductors while driving.
There is a risk of damage to property. Cover
Panic mode the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
not hit the rear window.
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press button on the remote control Opening
and hold for at least 3 seconds. Press button on the remote control for
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control approx. 1 second.
three times in succession.
Without automatic tailgate operation:
To switch off the alarm: press any button. The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
Tailgate With automatic tailgate operation:
The tailgate opens automatically.
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
Replacing the battery
remote control in the cargo area.
1. Remove the integrated key from the remote
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
control, refer to page 74.
try version, it is possible to specify whether the
tailgate can be unlocked with the remote control 2. Place the integrated key underneath the bat‐
and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. tery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift the
Adjusting the settings, refer to page 84. cover with a lever movement of the
integrated key, arrow 2.
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the tailgate is clear
during opening and closing.
72
3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow us‐ ▷ Interference of the radio connection from
ing a pointed object and lift it out. transmission towers or other equipment with
high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal
objects.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
rect proximity to the remote control.
4. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the posi‐ with electronic devices.
tive side facing up.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐
5. Press the cover closed. ing process of mobile devices, for instance
6. Push the integrated key into the remote con‐ charging of a mobile phone.
trol until it engages. ▷ The remote control is in direct proximity of
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐ the wireless charging tray.
er’s service center or another qualified Place the remote control down at a different
service center or repair shop or take location.
them to a collection point. In the case of interference, the vehicle can be
unlocked and locked from the outside with the
Additional remote controls integrated key, refer to page 74.
Additional remote controls are available from a

Starting the engine via emergency
dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop. detection of the remote control
Loss of the remote controls

A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐
placed by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Malfunction
General information
It is not possible to start the engine if the remote
A Check Control message is displayed.
control has not been detected.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
malfunction under the following circumstances:
state if the remote control has not been de‐
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ tected.
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 72.
73
Proceed as follows in this case: Removing

1. Hold the remote control with its back against
the marked area on the steering column. Pay
attention to the display in the instrument
cluster.
2. If the remote control is detected:
Start the engine within 10 seconds.
If the remote control is not detected, slightly
change the position of the remote control and re‐
peat the procedure.
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
Integrated key
Locking/unlocking via the door
General information lock
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked 1. Remove lid on the door lock.
without remote control using the integrated key. To do this, slide the integrated key into the
opening from below and remove the lid.
Safety information
WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possible with
special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it. 2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
NOTE from the inside.
The door lock is permanently joined with the
door. The door handle can be moved. When Alarm system
pulling the door handle with the integrated key The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐
inserted, paint or the integrated key can be cle is locked with the integrated key.
damaged. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ The alarm system is triggered when the door is
erty. Remove the integrated key before pulling opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via the
the outside door handle. door lock.
In order to stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle with
the remote control or switch on the ignition, if
needed, through emergency detection of the re‐
mote control, refer to page 73.
74
Buttons for the central ▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on
the door to be opened; the first time unlocks
locking system the door, the second time opens it. The other
doors remain locked.
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is Comfort Access
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning sys‐
tem and interior lights come on.
Concept
Overview The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the car's
interior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
Buttons for the central locking system. tions:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
Locking ▷ Convenient closing.
Press the button with the front doors ▷ Open the tailgate.
closed. ▷ Opening/closing the tailgate with no-touch
activation.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when Functional requirements
locking.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must
be located outside of the vehicle near the
Unlocking doors.
Press button. ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Opening
▷ Press button to unlock the doors to‐

gether, and then pull the door handle above
the armrest.
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the door
to open the door. The other doors remain
locked.
75
Unlocking Closing
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front Touch the surface on the door handle of the driv‐
passenger door completely. er's or front passenger door, arrow, with your fin‐
This corresponds with pressing the button ger and hold it there without grasping the door
on the remote control. handle.
This corresponds with pressing and holding the
button on the remote control.
Locking
In addition to locking, the windows and the glass
sunroof close. The exterior mirrors fold in, de‐
pending on the model.
Opening the tailgate
General information
Touch the surface on the door handle of the driv‐ If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,
er's or front passenger door with your finger for locked doors are not unlocked.
approx. 1 second without grasping the door han‐
dle. Safety information
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control. WARNING
Convenient closing tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
Safety information during opening and closing.
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can be
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.
76
With automatic tailgate

NOTE operation: opening and closing
The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. the tailgate with no-touch
There is a risk of damage to property. Make activation
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.
Concept
The tailgate can be opened and closed with no-
touch activation using the remote control you are
NOTE
carrying. Two sensors detect a forward-directed
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the rear foot motion in the central rear area and the tail‐
window and heat conductors while driving. gate is opened or closed.
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do General information
Opening If the remote control is in the sensor area, the
tailgate can be opened or closed inadvertently by
an unconscious or alleged recognized foot
movement.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐
cle.
If the tailgate is opened with no-touch activation,
locked doors are not unlocked.
Contactless opening and closing of the tailgate
Press button next on tailgate. must be activated in the settings.
This corresponds with pressing the button Safety information

on the remote control.
Without automatic tailgate operation:
WARNING
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may
ward.
be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas sys‐
With automatic tailgate operation: tem. There is a risk of injury. When moving your
The tailgate opens automatically. foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do
not touch the vehicle.
WARNING
during opening and closing.
77
Before the opening, the hazard warning system

NOTE flashes.
The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. Moving your foot again will stop the opening mo‐
There is a risk of damage to property. Make tion, and moving it one more time after that will
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate close the tailgate.
Closing
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
Settings
Before closing, the hazard warning system
1. "My Vehicle"
flashes and an acoustic signal sounds.
2. "Vehicle settings"
Moving your foot again will stop the closing mo‐
3. "Doors/Key" tion, and moving it one more time after that will
4. "Tailgate" re-open the tailgate.
5. Select desired setting:
Malfunction
▷ "Open by foot movement"
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
Contactless opening of the tailgate is
malfunction under the following circumstances:
switched on or off.
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
▷ "Close by foot movement"
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
Contactless closing of the tailgate is page 72.
switched on or off.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment with
Performing the foot movement high transmitting power.
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal
prox. one arm's length away from the rear of
objects.
the vehicle.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction
with metal objects.
of travel and immediately pull it back. With
this movement, the leg must pass through ▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
the ranges of both sensors. bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
rect proximity to the remote control.
with electronic devices.
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking
request recognition function on the door han‐
dles.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the
vehicle using the buttons of the remote control
or using the integrated key, refer to page 74.
Opening
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
78
Tailgate Without automatic tailgate

operation
General information
Opening from the outside
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, it is possible to specify whether the
tailgate can be unlocked with the remote control
and how the vehicle doors will respond to this.
Adjusting the settings, refer to page 84.
Safety information
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
WARNING
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or
Body parts can be jammed when operating the have the remote control with you.
Press button next on tailgate.
during opening and closing. ▷ Press button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.
NOTE be unlocked. Unlocking with the remote con‐
The tailgate swings back and up when it opens. trol, refer to page 72.
There is a risk of damage to property. Make The tailgate is opened slightly and can be swung
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate upward.
Opening from the inside
With Steptronic transmission:
NOTE
With the vehicle stationary, pull the but‐
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the rear ton in the storage compartment of the driver's
window and heat conductors while driving. door upwards.
If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P
the edges and ensure that pointed objects do
must be engaged first.
With manual transmission:
With the vehicle stationary, pull the but‐
ton in the storage compartment of the driver's
door upwards twice in quick succession.
The tailgate is opened slightly and can be swung

upward.
79
Closing From the outside
Grasp the recess grip and pull tailgate down. ▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or
have the remote control with you.
With automatic tailgate
operation Press the button on tailgate's exterior.
▷ Press button on the remote control

Opening for approx. 1 second.
General information
be unlocked. Opening with the remote con‐
When the trailer socket is in use, the tailgate can‐ trol, refer to page 72.
not be opened with the remote control or with
If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens au‐
the button in the car's interior.
tomatically to the adjusted opening height.
Adjusting the opening height
From the inside
You can set how far the tailgate should open.
With Steptronic transmission:
When adjusting the opening height, ensure that
there is a clearance of at least 4 in/10 cm above Pull button in the storage compartment
the tailgate. of the driver's door upward.
If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position P
1. "My Vehicle"
must be engaged first.
3. "Doors/Key" With manual transmission:
4. "Tailgate" With the vehicle stationary, pull the but‐
ton in the storage compartment of the driver's
5. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired
door upwards twice in quick succession.
opening height.
If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens au‐
tomatically to the adjusted opening height.
Interruption of the opening procedure

The opening procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
80
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the

tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate.
▷ By pressing the button on the remote control.
Pressing again continues the opening mo‐
tion.
▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the stor‐
age compartment. Pulling again continues
▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the
the opening motion.
tailgate.
Closing ▷ Press button, arrow 2.

The vehicle will be locked after closing the
From the outside tailgate. The driver's door must be closed for
Press the button on tailgate's exterior. this purpose and the remote control must be
outside of the vehicle in the area of the tail‐
From the inside gate.
Press button in the storage compartment

of the driver's door and keep it pressed. Interruption of the closing procedure
The remote control must be located in the car's The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
interior for this function. lowing situations:
▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky movement.
An acoustic signal sounds before the tailgate is
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the
closed.
tailgate. Pressing again re-opens the tailgate.
From inside the tailgate ▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate. Pressing again re-opens the tailgate.
Without Comfort Access:
▷ By releasing the button in the storage com‐
partment of the driver's door. Pulling again
and holding continues the closing motion.
Malfunction
Safety information
WARNING
Press button on the inside of the tailgate. With manual operation of a blocked tailgate, it
can release itself unexpectedly from the block‐
With Comfort Access: age. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Do not operate the tailgate man‐
ually if it is blocked. Have it checked by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
81
Manual operation tected remote control must be clearly allocated

Operate the unlocked tailgate manually with a to the driver.
slow and smooth motion. This is the case when:
To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly ▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own re‐
only. Closing occurs automatically. mote control.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle.
Driver profile ▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the
driver's door.
Concept Settings
In the driver profiles, individual settings for sev‐ The settings for the following systems and func‐
eral drivers can be stored and called up again tions are stored in the active profile. The scope
when required. of storable settings depends on country and
equipment.
General information ▷ Unlocking and locking.
There are three driver profiles with which per‐ ▷ Lights.
sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐
mote control has one of these driver profiles as‐ ▷ Climate control.
signed. ▷ Radio.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote control, ▷ Instrument cluster.
the assigned personal driver profile will be acti‐ ▷ Programmable memory buttons.
vated. All settings stored in the driver profile are
▷ Volumes, tone.
automatically applied.
▷ Control Display.
If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings dur‐ ▷ Navigation.
ing unlocking. These settings are also restored, if ▷ PDC Park Distance Control.
the vehicle has been used in the meantime by a ▷ Rearview camera.
person with a different remote control.
▷ Head-up Display.
Changes to the settings are automatically stored
▷ Driving Dynamics Control.
in the driver profile currently activated.
▷ Seat position, exterior mirror position, steer‐
If another driver profile is selected via iDrive, the
ing wheel position where applicable.
settings stored in it will be applied automatically.
The new driver profile is assigned to the remote Both the positions saved via the seat memory
control currently used. and the last position set are saved.
There is an additional guest profile available that ▷ Intelligent Safety.
is not assigned to any remote control. It can be
used to apply settings in the vehicle without Profile management
changing the personal driver profiles.
Selecting a driver profile
Functional requirements Regardless of the remote control in use, a differ‐
For the system to be able to identify the driver ent driver profile may be activated. This allows
profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐ you to call up personal vehicle settings, even if
82
you did not unlock the vehicle with your own re‐ 5. Enter profile name.
mote control. 6. Select the symbol.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
Resetting a driver profile
The settings of the driver profile currently in use
2. "Driver profiles"
are reset to their factory settings.
3. Select driver profile.
Via iDrive:
4. "OK"
1. "My Vehicle"
▷ All settings stored in the called-up driver pro‐
file are automatically applied. 2. "Driver profiles"
▷ The called-up driver profile is assigned to the 3. Select driver profile.
remote control being used at the time. The driver profile marked with this symbol
▷ If the driver profile is already assigned to a dif‐ can be reset.
ferent remote control, this driver profile will 4. "Reset driver profile"
apply to both remote controls. 5. "OK"
Using a guest profile Exporting driver profiles

The guest profile is for individual settings that are Most settings of the active driver profile can be
stored in none of the three personal driver pro‐ exported.
files.
Exporting is helpful when storing and retrieving
Via iDrive: personal settings, for instance before delivering
1. "My Vehicle" the vehicle to a workshop. The stored driver pro‐
files can be taken into another vehicle.
2. "Driver profiles"
Via iDrive:
3. "Drive off (guest)"
4. "OK" 1. "My Vehicle"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not 2. "Driver profiles"
assigned to the current remote control. 3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this symbol
Renaming a driver profile can be exported.
A personal name can be assigned to the active 4. "Export driver profile"
driver profile to avoid confusion between the
5. Select a storage device for exporting the
driver profiles.
driver profile.
Via iDrive:
▷ "USB device"
1. "My Vehicle" Select USB storage device, as needed,
2. "Driver profiles" refer to page 59.
3. Select driver profile. ▷ Online.
The driver profile marked with this symbol
can be renamed. Importing driver profiles
4. "Change driver profile name" The existing settings of the active driver profile
are overwritten with the settings of the imported
driver profile.
83
Via iDrive:
Settings
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles" General information
3. Select the driver profile to be overwritten. Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
The driver profile marked with this symbol try version, various settings for opening and clos‐
can be overwritten. ing are possible.
4. "Import driver profile" These settings are stored for the driver profile,
refer to page 82, currently used.
5. Select a storage device for importing the
driver profile.
Unlocking
▷ USB storage device: "USB device"
Select USB storage device as needed. Doors
▷ Online. Via iDrive:
6. Select the driver profile to be imported.
1. "My Vehicle"
Displaying driver profiles during 2. "Vehicle settings"

start 3. "Doors/Key"
The driver profiles can be displayed during each 4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"
start to select the desired profile. 5. Select desired setting:
Via iDrive: ▷ "Driver's door only"
1. "My Vehicle" Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
2. "Driver profiles" flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks
the entire vehicle.
3. "Show driver profiles at startup"
▷ "All doors"
System limits The entire vehicle is unlocked.
A clear assignment between the remote control

Tailgate
and driver may not be possible in the following
cases, for example. Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, this setting may not be offered.
▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his or
her own remote control, but another person Via iDrive:
is driving. 1. "My Vehicle"
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort 2. "Vehicle settings"
Access and has multiple remote controls with
him or her. 3. "Doors/Key"
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not 4.

locked and unlocked. The text next to the symbol indicates the cur‐
▷ Multiple remote controls are located outside rent setting.
of the vehicle. 5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Tailgate"
84
Depending on your vehicle's optional fea‐ Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, lock‐
tures, the tailgate is either unlocked or ing by one.
opened. ▷ With alarm system:
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)" "Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
Depending on your vehicle's optional fea‐ Unlocking is signaled by one honk of the
tures, the tailgate is either unlocked or horn.
opened and the doors unlocked.
▷ "Tailgate opens after unlocking" Automatic locking
The vehicle must be unlocked before the Via iDrive:
tailgate can be used with the remote con‐
trol. 1. "My Vehicle"
▷ "Button lock" 2. "Vehicle settings"
It is not possible to use the tailgate via the 3. "Doors/Key"
remote control. 4. Select desired setting:
▷ "Lock automatically"
Adjusting the last seat and mirror The vehicle locks automatically after a
position short period of time if no door is opened
Via iDrive: after unlocking.
1. "My Vehicle" ▷ "Lock after starting to drive"
2. "Driver profiles" The vehicle locks automatically after you
drive off.
3. Select driver profile.
The setting can be made for the driver
Automatic unlocking
profile marked with this symbol.
Via iDrive:
4. "Last seat position automatic"
When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's seat 1. "My Vehicle"
and exterior mirrors resume their last set posi‐ 2. "Vehicle settings"
tions. 3. "Doors/Key"
The most recent position is independent of the 4. "Unlock at end of trip"
positions saved via the seat memory.
After the engine is switched off by pressing
the Start/Stop button, the locked vehicle is
Confirmation signals from the automatically unlocked.
vehicle
Via iDrive:
Alarm system
1. "My Vehicle"
General information
3. "Doors/Key"
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐ system reacts to the following changes:
tion signals.
▷ Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood or
▷ "Flash for lock/unlock" the tailgate.
85
▷ Movements in the car's interior. ▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐ three times in succession.
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
the vehicle.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage. Indicator light on the interior
▷ Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐ mirror
nosis.
The alarm system signals these changes visually
and acoustically:
▷ Acoustic alarm:
Depending on local regulations, the acoustic
alarm may be suppressed.
▷ Visual alarm:
By flashing the exterior lighting.
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 sec‐

Switching on/off
onds:
When you lock and unlock the vehicle with the
The alarm system is switched on.
remote control or Comfort Access, the alarm
system will also switch on or off at the same ▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds,
time. then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
Opening the doors with the alarm are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate are
system switched on not correctly closed. Correctly closed access
points are secured.
The alarm system is triggered when a door is
opened if the door was unlocked using the When the still open access points are closed,
integrated key in the door lock. interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
will be switched on.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 87.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
Opening the tailgate with the The vehicle has not been tampered with.
alarm system switched on ▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking un‐
The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm til the engine ignition is switched on, but no
system is switched on. longer than approx. 5 minutes:
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and moni‐ An alarm has been triggered.
tored again provided the doors are locked. The
hazard warning system flashes once. Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
Panic mode
The alarm system responds in situations such as
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐ attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is
self in a dangerous situation. towed.
▷ Press button on the remote control
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
86
Interior motion sensor Power windows

The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
General information
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
Avoiding unintentional alarms
windows are automatically closed except a gap.
General information
Safety information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized
action occurred. WARNING
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm: When operating the windows, body parts and
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
or risk of damage to property. Make sure that
▷ In duplex garages. the area of movement of the windows is clear
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at during opening and closing.
sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
Overview
▷ At the gas station: if the vehicle is locked after
refueling starts.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off in such situations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor

and interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is
locked.
Power windows
The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
Safety switch
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
Opening
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the remote control or ▷ Press the switch to the resistance point.
switch on the ignition, if needed through The window opens while the switch is being
emergency detection of remote control, refer held.
to page 73.
▷ With Comfort Access: ▷ Press the switch beyond the resistance
point.
If you are carrying the remote control on your
person, grasp the door handle on the driver's The window opens automatically. Pressing
or front passenger door completely. the switch again stops the motion.
87
Convenient opening via the remote control, refer

to page 71. 2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there.
Closing
The window closes without jam protection.
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point.
The window closes while the switch is being Safety switch
held.
General information
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance The safety switch in the driver's door can be
point. used to prevent children, for instance from open‐
The window closes automatically if the door ing and closing the rear windows using the
is closed. Pulling again stops the motion. switches in the rear.
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 76. If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
safety function is switched off automatically.
Jam protection system
Switching on/off
General information Press button.
If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as a The LED lights up if the safety function
window closes, closing is interrupted. is switched on.
The window opens slightly.
Safety information Panoramic glass sunroof

WARNING General information
Accessories on the windows such as antennas The glass sunroof is ready for operation when
can impact jam protection. There is a risk of in‐ the ignition is switched on.
jury. Do not install accessories in the area of In the event of a severe accident, the glass sun‐
movement of the windows. roof is automatically closed.
Closing without the jam protection Safety information

system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice might WARNING
prevent normal closing, proceed as follows: Body parts can be jammed when operating the
glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point sure that the area of movement of the glass
and hold it there. sunroof is clear during opening and closing.
The window closes with limited jam protec‐
tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific
threshold, closing is interrupted.
88
Overview The sun protection opens automatically. If the

sun protection is already fully open, the glass
sunroof opens automatically.
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If the
glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted
position, the sun protection closes automati‐
cally.
Pressing the switch upward stops the motion.
Opening/closing the glass

sunroof and sun protection
Tilting up and closing the tilted
together
glass sunroof
Briefly press the switch twice in
Push switch briefly upward.
succession in the desired direc‐
▷ The closed glass sunroof tilts tion past the resistance point.
and the sun protection opens
The glass sunroof and sun pro‐
slightly.
tection move together. Pressing
▷ The opened glass sunroof the switch upward stops the motion.
closes until it is in the tilted
position. The sun protection Convenient opening via the remote control, refer
does not move. to page 71.
▷ The tilted glass sunroof closes. Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 75.
Comfort position
Opening/closing the glass
In some models, the wind noises in the car's in‐
sunroof and sun protection
terior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not
separately fully open. In these models, the automatic func‐
▷ Press the switch in the desired tion initially only opens the glass sunroof up to
direction to the resistance this comfort position.
point and hold it there. Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐
Holding down the switch roof fully.
opens the sun protection. If
the sun protection is already Jam protection system
fully open, the glass sunroof
opens. General information
The glass sunroof closes If the closing force exceeds a certain value when
while the switch is being held. closing the glass sunroof, the closing operation is
If the glass sunroof is already interrupted once the roof reaches the half-open
closed or in the tilted position, position, or it is stopped when closing from the
the sun protection closes. tilted position. The glass sunroof opens slightly.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction past
the resistance point.
89
Closing from the open position Make sure that the closing area is clear.
without jam protection
If there is an external danger, proceed as follows: Initializing the system
Press the switch up and hold it
1. Push the switch forward past the resistance
until initialization is complete.
point and hold.
The glass sunroof closes with limited jam
protection. If the closing force exceeds a spe‐
cific threshold, closing is interrupted.
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.
▷ If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then
closes again.
▷ If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,
then opens and closes again.
2. Push the switch forward again past the resist‐ Initialization is complete once the glass sunroof
ance point and hold until the glass sunroof and sun protection have opened then closed
closes without jam protection. Make sure that again.
the closing area is clear.
Closing from the raised position

without jam protection
If there is an external danger,
push the switch forward past the
resistance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes without
jam protection.
Initializing after a power

interruption
General information
After a power failure during the opening or clos‐
ing process, the glass sunroof can only be oper‐
ated to a limited extent.
The system can be initialized under the following
conditions.
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ The engine is running.
▷ The external temperature is above
41 ℉/5 ℃.
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without jam protection.
90
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel

WARNING
options With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the
efficacy of safety gear, including safety belts
can no longer be ensured. There is a risk of
sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Ad‐
just the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the
backrest so that it is in the most upright posi‐
tion as possible and do not adjust again while
driving.
Sitting safely WARNING

There is a risk of jamming when moving the
An ideal seating position that meets the needs of seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
the occupants can make a vital contribution to to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
relaxed, fatigue-free driving. ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
In the event of an accident, the correct seating ment.
position plays an important role. Additionally, fol‐
low the following chapters for safe driving:
Electrically adjustable seats
▷ Seats, refer to page 91.
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 94. General information
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 96. The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for
▷ Airbags, refer to page 150. the profile currently used. When the vehicle is
unlocked via the remote control, the position is
automatically retrieved if the function, refer to
Front seats page 85, is activated for this purpose.
The current seat position can be stored using
Safety information the memory function, refer to page 98.
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead to un‐
expected movements of the seat. Vehicle con‐
trol could be lost. There is a risk of an accident.
Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when
the vehicle is stationary.
91
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
Overview Seat tilt
1 Memory function Move switch up or down.

2 Backrest width
3 Lumbar support Backrest tilt
4 Backrest tilt
5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Forward/backward
Move switch forward or backward.
Thigh support
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust

the thigh support.
Lumbar support
Push switch up or down. The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar region
of the spine. The lower back and the spine are
supported for upright posture.
92
▷ Press the front/rear section of Seat heating

the button:
The curvature is increased/
decreased. Switching on
▷ Press the upper/lower section Press button once for each temperature
of the button: level.
The curvature is shifted up/ The maximum temperature is reached when
down. three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes
after a stop, seat heating is activated automati‐
Backrest width
cally with the temperature selected last.
Concept When ECO PRO is activated, refer to page 232,
the heater output is reduced.
Adjusting the backrest width may improve lateral
support when taking corners.
Switching off
General information Press and hold the button, until the
You can change the backrest width by adjusting LEDs go out.
the side wings of the backrest.
Settings Rear seats

▷ Press the front section of the
button:
Second row of seats
The backrest width de‐
creases. Safety information
▷ Press the rear section of the
button:
WARNING
The backrest width increases.
There is a risk of jamming when folding down
the center armrest in the rear. There is a risk of
Front seat heating injury. Make sure that the area of movement of
the center armrest is clear during folding down.
Overview
WARNING
Unexpected movements of the backrest while
driving may occur due to unintentional unlock‐
ing of the rear backrests by the straps. There is
a risk of injury. Do not fasten any objects to the
straps for unlocking the rear backrests.
93
Forward/backward The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear seat
are intended for the persons sitting on the left
General information and right.
The rear seat is divided into two parts at a ratio of The center safety belt buckles of the rear seat
60 – 40. The left seat is connected to the middle are intended for the persons sitting in the middle.
section.
General information
Settings Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off. Al‐
though airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will
be correct for adult seat occupants of every build
if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired di‐
rection.
WARNING
After releasing the lever, move the seat forward
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one
or back slightly making sure it engages properly.
person will potentially defeat the ability of the
safety belt to serve its protective function.
Backrest tilt There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do
not allow more than one person to wear a sin‐
gle safety belt. Infants and children are not al‐
lowed on an occupant's lap, but must be trans‐
ported and secured in designated child
restraint systems.
WARNING
The efficacy of safety gear, including safety
Pull the strap and apply your weight to the back‐ belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts
rest or lift it off, as necessary. are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐
stance in the event of an accident or during
Safety belts braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all
Number of safety belts and occupants are wearing safety belts correctly.
safety belt buckles
The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to en‐
sure occupant safety. However, they can only of‐
fer protection when adjusted correctly.
94
Buckling the safety belt

WARNING 1. Slowly guide the safety belt out of the holder
With a rear backrest that is not locked, the pro‐ when fastening it.
tective function of the middle safety belt is not 2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt
guaranteed. There is a risk of injuries or danger buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage
to life. If you are using the middle safety belt, audibly.
lock the wider rear seat backrest.
WARNING
The efficacy of safety gear, including safety
belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the
following situations:
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
way.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were Unbuckling the safety belt
modified. 1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts,
mechanism.
safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retrac‐
tors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have
the safety belts checked after an accident at Middle safety belt in the rear
the dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop. Buckling the safety belt
Correct use of safety belts

▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to
your body over your lap and shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over
your lap. The safety belt may not press on
your stomach.
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or 1. Pull the buckle tongues out of the mounts in
fragile objects. the roof.
▷ Avoid thick clothing. 2. Insert the lower buckle tongue in the belt
buckle, arrow 1.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward
around your upper body. 3. Insert the upper buckle tongue in the belt
buckle, arrow 2.
Safety belt buckles must audibly click into
place.
95
Unbuckling the safety belt ▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
1. Hold the safety belt firmly. ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
3. Use the buckle tongue, arrow 1, to open the straint is as close as possible to the back
second safety belt buckle, arrow 2. of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
4. Guide the safety belt to the mount in the

roofliner. WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
Safety belt reminder for driver's tective effect in the head and neck area. There
and passenger's seat is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
The indicator light lights up and a signal hangers, directly on the head restraint.
sounds. Make sure that the safety belts ▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
are positioned correctly. The safety belt termined to be safe for attachment to a
reminder can also be activated if objects are head restraint.
placed on the front passenger seat.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Front head restraints

Adjusting the height
Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to removed or
not correctly adjusted head restraints can
cause injuries in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats. ▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
head restraint down.
96
After setting the height, move the head restraint ▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
up or down slightly, making sure it engages straint is as close as possible to the back
properly. of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be WARNING
sitting in the seat in question.
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
tective effect in the head and neck area. There
1. Raise the head restraint up against the resist‐
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
ance.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
restraint out completely.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
Installing
head restraint.
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
restraint.
pillows, while driving.
Rear head restraints Height
Safety information Settings
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to removed or
not correctly adjusted head restraints can
cause injuries in the head and neck area. There
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐ ▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push
ports the back of the head at as close to the head restraint down.
eye level as possible.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
97
After setting the height, move the head restraint ▷ Lumbar support.
up or down slightly, making sure it engages
properly. Safety information
Folding down the head restraint WARNING

Only fold the head restraint back if no one will be Using the memory function while driving can
sitting in the seat in question. lead to unexpected movements of the seat. Ve‐
hicle control could be lost. There is a risk of an
accident. Only retrieve the memory function
when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
▷ To the back: press the button, arrow 1, and ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
fold the head restraint back, arrow 2. ment.
▷ Forward: fold the head restraint toward the
front as far as it will go. Make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Overview
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐
essary, retrieved using the memory function: Storing
▷ Seat position. 1. Switch on the ignition.
▷ Exterior mirror position. 2. Set the desired position.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display.

3. Press button. The LED in the button
lights up.
General information
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED is
Different settings can be assigned to two mem‐ lit. The LED goes out.
ory locations.
Button was pressed inadvertently:
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow‐
ing settings are not stored: Press button again.
▷ Backrest width. The LED goes out.
98
Calling up settings dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind

by looking over your shoulder.
The stored position is called up automatically.
Press selected button 1 or 2.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting Overview
the seat or one of the memory buttons is
pressed.
While driving, the seat position adjustment on
the driver's side is interrupted after a short time.
Calling up of a seat position

deactivated
After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐
tions is deactivated to save battery power.
1 Settings
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
▷ Open or close the door or tailgate.
3 Folding in and out
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Mirrors Slide the switch.
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting electrically
General information Press button.
The mirror on the front passenger side is more The mirror movement follows the button
curved than the driver's side mirror. movement.
The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile
currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via Malfunction
the remote control, the position is automatically
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
retrieved if the function, refer to page 85, is acti‐
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass.
vated for this purpose.
The current exterior mirror position can be stored Folding in and out
using the memory function, refer to page 98.
Safety information NOTE

Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle
can be damaged in vehicle washes. There is a
WARNING
risk of damage to property. Before washing,
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.
they appear. The distance to the traffic behind
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance
Press button.
while changing lanes. There is a risk of an acci‐
99
Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx. Interior mirror, manually

15 mph/20 km/h. dimmable
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the fol‐
lowing situations: Turn knob
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the ignition is switched on.
Automatic dimming feature Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
the interior mirror.
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the interior mir‐
ror are used to control this. Interior mirror, automatic
dimming feature
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior
mirror Overview
Concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward. This
improves your view of the curb and other low-ly‐
ing obstacles when parking, for instance.
Activating
1. Slide the switch to the driver's side Photocells are used for control:
mirror position.
▷ In the mirror glass.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger's side
Functional requirements
mirror position. ▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the interior
mirror and the windshield.
100
Steering wheel Switching on/off

Press button.
Safety information
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving can
lead to unexpected steering wheel movements.
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of
an accident. Adjust the steering wheel while
the vehicle is stationary only.
Settings
1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating position.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Heated steering wheel
Overview
Heated steering wheel
101
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely

The right place for children

Safety information as soon as a suitable child restraint system can
no longer be used due to their age, weight, and
size.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can cause the Safety information
vehicle to move and endanger themselves and
WARNING
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on
▷ Releasing the parking brake. children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suita‐
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ ble additional child restraint systems. The effi‐
dows. cacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety
belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not the event of an accident or during braking and
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
hicle. Take the remote control with you when danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft,
exiting and lock the vehicle. 150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.
Always transport children in the Children on the front passenger

rear seat seat
General information General information
Accident research shows that the safest place Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
for children is in the rear seat. straint system in the front passenger seat, make
Transport children younger than 13 years of age sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the
or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear seat front passenger side are deactivated. Automatic
in suitable child restraint systems designed for deactivation of front-seat passenger airbags, re‐
the age, weight and size of the child. Children fer to page 152.
13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt
102
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Safety information backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
WARNING If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a straints or remove them.
child in a child restraint system when the air‐
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
WARNING
bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up. The protective effect of damaged child restraint
systems or of child restraint systems exposed
to an accident and their fastening systems can
be limited or lost. A child can e.g.,not suffi‐
WARNING ciently restrained, for instance in the event of
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐ an accident or braking and evasive maneuvers.
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐ There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Have
ment or improper installation of the child seat. damaged child restraint systems or of child re‐
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make straint systems exposed to an accident and
sure that the child restraint system fits securely their fastening systems checked and possibly
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the replaced by the dealer’s service center or an‐
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐ other qualified service center or repair shop.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐ Before mounting
straints or remove them. Before mounting child restraint systems, ensure
that the rear seat backrests are locked.
Move the rear seats into the rearmost position to
Installing child restraint facilitate assembly of the child restraint system.
systems On the front passenger seat

General information Deactivating airbags
Pay attention to the specifications of the child re‐
straint system manufacturer when selecting, in‐
WARNING
stalling, and using child restraint systems.
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air‐
Safety information
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
WARNING bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐ GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐
ment or improper installation of the child seat. After installing a child restraint system in the
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
sure that the child restraint system fits securely knee and side airbags on the front passenger
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the side are deactivated.
103
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au‐ Unlocking the safety belt
tomatically, refer to page 152. 1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
Seat position and height
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
Before installing a child restraint system, move
pletely.
the front passenger seat as far back as possible
and bring it as far up as possible to obtain the In some cases it may be necessary to separate
best possible position for the belt and to offer the lower belt attachment. Safety belts, refer to
optimal protection in the event of an accident. page 95.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
move the front passenger seat carefully forward
LATCH child restraint fixing
until the best possible belt guide position is system
reached.
General information
Backrest width
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint system in the front passenger seat, Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐
open the backrest width completely. Do not mation of the child restraint system manufacturer
change the backrest width again and do not call when installing and using LATCH child restraint
up a memory position. fixing systems.
Child seat security Mounts for the lower LATCH

anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is
restrained by the internal harnesses.
Safety information
WARNING
The rear safety belts and the front passenger If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are
safety belt can be permanently locked to fasten not correctly engaged, the protective effect of
child restraint systems. the LATCH child restraint fixing system can be
limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. Make sure that the lower anchors are se‐
Locking the safety belt
curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐
1. Pull out the belt strap completely. straint fixing system fits securely against the
2. Secure the child restraint system with the backrest.
safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it
tight against the child restraint system. The
safety belt is locked.
104
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Position Child restraint systems

Symbol Meaning with tether strap
The corresponding symbol
shows the mounts for the lower Safety information
LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower an‐ WARNING
chors are marked with a pair, 2, If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used
of LATCH symbols. for the child restraint system, the protective ef‐
For vehicles equipped with a fect can be reduced. There is a risk of injury.
middle seat: Make sure that the upper retaining strap is not
It is not recommended to use guided across sharp edges and without twist‐
the inner lower anchors of ing to the upper retaining strap.
standard outer LATCH positions
to fasten a child restraint system
on the middle seat. Use the ve‐ WARNING
hicle safety belt instead for the If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective
middle seat. effect of the child restraint system is limited or
there is none. In particular situations, for in‐
Before installing LATCH child stance braking maneuvers or in case of an acci‐
dent, the rear backrest can fold forward. There
restraint fixing systems
is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the that the rear backrests are locked.
child restraint system.
Assembly of LATCH child NOTE

restraint fixing systems
The anchors for the upper retaining straps of
1. Install child restraint system, see manufactur‐ child restraint systems are only provided for
er's information. these retaining straps. When other objects are
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There
erly connected. is a risk of damage to property. Only mount
child restraint systems to the upper retaining
straps.
Anchors
The respective symbol shows the anchor
for the upper retaining strap. Seats with
an upper top tether are marked with this
symbol. It can be found on the rear seat backrest
or the rear window shelf.
105
Routing the retaining strap Locking the doors and

windows in the rear
Rear doors
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
5 Seat backrest
The door can now be opened from the outside
6 Upper retaining strap
only.
Attaching the upper retaining Safety switch for the rear

strap to the anchor Press button on the driver's door.
1. Raise the head restraint, if needed. The LED lights up if the safety function
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between or is switched on.
along both sides of the supports of the head
restraint to the anchor. This locks various functions so that they cannot
be operated from the rear.
3. If there is a retaining strap, run it between the
backrest and the cargo cover.
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
anchor.
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
106
Driving CONTROLS
Driving
Vehicle features and All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
out.
options To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary elec‐
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ tronic systems/power consumers.
Safety measures
options or country versions. This also applies to The ignition is switched off automatically in the
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ following situations while the vehicle is stationary
ing these functions and systems, the applicable and the engine is off:
laws and regulations must be observed. ▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the low
beams are switched on.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged com‐
Start/Stop button pletely, so that the engine can still be started.
▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
Concept the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the
Pressing the Start/Stop button low beams are switched off.
switches the ignition on or off and ▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
starts the engine. with driver's door open and low beams off.
Steptronic transmission: the en‐ ▷ When the front doors are opened if there is
gine starts with the brake pedal no other person sitting in the front seats.
pressed when you press the Start/Stop button. The low beams switch to parking lights after
some minutes of no use.
Ignition on Steptronic transmission with a tap-operated se‐
lector lever, refer to page 121: when switching
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop
off the ignition, the selector lever position P is
button, and do not press on the brake pedal at
engaged automatically if the selector lever posi‐
the same time.
tion R, D or M/S is engaged.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instru‐ Radio-ready state
ment cluster light up for a varied length of time.
To save battery power when the engine is off, General information
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary elec‐ In the radio-ready state, certain power consum‐
tronic systems/power consumers. ers remain ready for operation.
Ignition off Activating

Steptronic transmission: shift to selector lever With the engine running, press the Start/Stop
position P, press the Start/Stop button again button.
without stepping on the brake.
107
CONTROLS Driving
If the engine is not running and the ignition is

switched on: the system automatically activates WARNING
radio-ready state when the door is opened if the An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
lights are switched off or the daytime running possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident.
lights are switched on. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
The radio-ready state remains active if, for in‐ ing.
stance the ignition is automatically switched off In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
for the following reasons: against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door. ▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
▷ When automatically switching from low turn the front wheels in the direction of the
beams to parking lights. curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
Switching off automatically also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐ wheel chock.
cally in the following situations:
▷ If the driver's or front passenger door is
opened when exiting the vehicle, with the en‐ NOTE
gine switched off manually. In the case of repeated starting attempts or re‐
▷ If the ignition is switched off manually with peated starting in quick succession, the fuel is
the Start/Stop button. not burned or is inadequately burned. The cata‐
lytic converter can overheat. There is a risk of
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
damage to property. Avoid repeated starting in
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the central quick succession.
locking system.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged com‐
pletely, so that the engine can still be started. Gasoline engine
Depending on the motorization, the full drive
power may not be available for approximately
Starting the engine 30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case,
the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.
Safety information
Steptronic transmission
DANGER
Starting the engine
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐ 2. Press the Start/Stop button.
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐ The ignition is activated automatically for a brief
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐ time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
ficient ventilation.
108
Driving CONTROLS
Engine stop 2. Engage selector lever position P.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Safety information The engine is switched off.

The radio-ready state is switched on.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can cause the Auto Start/Stop function
vehicle to move and endanger themselves and
Concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
▷ Releasing the parking brake. The system switches off the engine during a
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ stop, for instance in traffic congestion or at traffic
dows. lights. The ignition remains switched on. The en‐
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. gine starts automatically for driving off.
General information
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ Depending on the selected driving mode, the
hicle. Take the remote control with you when system is automatically activated or deactivated.
exiting and lock the vehicle. After every start of the engine using the Start/
Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in
the last selected state. When the Auto Start/Stop
function is active, it is available when the vehicle
WARNING
is traveling faster than about 3 mph/5 km/h.
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident.
Engine stop
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
The engine is switched off automatically during a
against rolling away, follow the following:
stop under the following conditions:
▷ Set the parking brake.
Steptronic transmission:
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
D.
curb.
▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while the
vehicle is stopped.
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock. ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driv‐
er's door is closed.
In order to be able to release the brake pedal, en‐
Steptronic transmission gage the selector lever in position P. The engine
remains off.
Switching off the engine
To continue driving depress the brake pedal.
1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply the When a gear is engaged, the engine starts auto‐
parking brake. matically.
109
CONTROLS Driving
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced Starting the engine
when the engine is switched off.
The engine starts automatically under the follow‐
ing conditions:
Displays in the instrument cluster
▷ Steptronic transmission: by releasing the
The READY display in the tach‐ brake pedal.
ometer signals that the Auto
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Start/Stop function is ready to
start the engine automatically.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it will
The display indicates that the
not start again automatically if any one of the fol‐
conditions for an automatic en‐
lowing conditions are met:
gine stop have not been met.
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Functional limitations Some indicator lights light up for a varied length
The engine is not switched off automatically in of time.
situations such as the following: The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop
▷ In case of a steep downhill grade. button.
▷ External temperature too low.
Functional limitations
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running. Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated or
lowing situations:
cooled to the required level.
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior when
▷ The engine is not yet at operating tempera‐
the air conditioning is switched on.
ture.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steer‐
ing wheel is being turned. ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from selec‐
tor lever position D to R, N or M/S.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Steptronic transmission: change from selec‐
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation
tor lever position P to N, D, R or M/S.
when the automatic climate control is
switched on. ▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation
when the automatic climate control is
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
switched on.
▷ At higher elevations.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ The hood is unlocked.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
▷ HDC Hill Descent Control is activated. the heating is switched on.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N,
M/S or R.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
110
Driving CONTROLS
Activating/deactivating the Malfunction

system manually The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches
off the engine automatically. A Check Control
Using the button message is displayed. It is possible to continue
driving. Have the system checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Parking brake
Concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle
from rolling when it is parked.
Press button.
▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is

Safety information
deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic en‐ WARNING
gine stop. An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
The engine can only be stopped or started possibly roll away. There is a risk of an accident.
via the Start/Stop button. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is ac‐
tivated. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
Switching off the vehicle during an ▷ Set the parking brake.
automatic engine stop ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can turn the front wheels in the direction of the
be switched off permanently, for instance when curb.
leaving it. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
Steptronic transmission: also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
1. Engage selector lever position P.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is WARNING
deactivated.
Unattended children or animals can cause the
3. Set the parking brake. vehicle to move and endanger themselves and
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button. traffic, for instance due to the following actions:
Automatic deactivation ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
is deactivated automatically for safety reasons, dows.
for instance if no driver is detected.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
111
CONTROLS Driving
▷ Using vehicle equipment. The indicator light lights up red, a signal

There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not sounds and the brake lights light up.
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ A Check Control message is displayed.
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle. If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete stop,
the parking brake is engaged.
Overview Releasing
Releasing manually
2. Steptronic transmission: press the

switch while the brake is pressed or selector
lever position P is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Parking brake
Automatic release in cars with
Setting For automatic release, step on the accelerator
pedal.
With a stationary vehicle The LED and indicator light go out.
Pull the switch. The parking brake is automatically released
The LED lights up. when you step on the accelerator under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
The indicator light lights up red. The ▷ Engine on.
parking brake is set.
▷ Drive mode engaged.
Depending on the stopping situation, the parking ▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.
brake is engaged automatically.
Steptronic transmission: in some parking situa‐ Malfunction
tions, the parking brake is automatically engaged, In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
when selector lever position P is engaged. In parking brake, secure the vehicle against rolling
these cases, the parking brake is released auto‐ using a wheel chock, for instance when leaving it.
matically when you leave the selector lever posi‐
tion P. After a power failure
While driving Putting the parking brake into
To use as emergency brake while driving: operation
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes 1. Switch on the ignition.
hard while the switch is being pulled.
112
Driving CONTROLS
Via iDrive:
2. Press the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is set. 1. "My Vehicle"
It may take several seconds for the brake to be 2. "Vehicle settings"
put into operation. Any sounds associated with 3. "Lighting"
this are normal. 4. "Exterior lighting"
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ 5. "One-touch turn signal"
ter goes out as soon as the parking brake
is ready for operation.
Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
Signaling briefly
Turn signal, high beams, Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it
headlight flasher there for as long as you want the turn signal to
flash.
Turn signal
Malfunction
Turn signal in exterior mirror Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indi‐
When driving and during operation of the turn cates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in
the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on High beams, headlight flasher
the exterior mirror are easy to see. Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
Using turn signals
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.

▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Press the lever past the resistance point.
Canada: the lever returns into its starting position
after actuation. To switch off manually, slightly
tap the lever to the resistance point.
Washer/wiper system
General information
Triple turn signal activation
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
this may damage the wiper blades or cause them
The turn signal flashes three times. to become worn more quickly.
The function can be activated or deactivated.
113
CONTROLS Driving
Safety information Switching off and brief wipe
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
Press the lever down.
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
NOTE reaches its standard position.
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the ▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐ standard position.
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a The lever automatically returns to its initial
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐ position when released.
shield prior to switching the wipers on.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Switching on
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of the
rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain
sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is
preset.
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
Safety information
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Intermittent operation or rain sensor, posi‐
NOTE
tion 1.
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
accidentally start moving in vehicle washes.
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3. There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐
When travel is interrupted with the wiper system vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.
switched on: when travel continues, the wipers
resume at their previous speed.
114
Driving CONTROLS
Activating Windshield and headlight

washer system
Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at
low temperatures and obstruct the view. There
is a risk of an accident. Only use the washer
systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use
Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐ antifreeze, if needed.
tion, arrow 1.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated. NOTE
If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper opera‐ When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the
tion is deactivated. wash pump cannot work as intended. There is
a risk of damage to property. Do not use the
washer system when the washer fluid reservoir
Deactivating
is empty.
Press the lever back into the standard position.
Setting the frequency or sensitivity Cleaning the windshield

of the rain sensor
Pull the lever.

Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency or The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
sensitivity of the rain sensor. shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor. In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regular
intervals when the vehicle's lights are switched
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
on.
sensor.
Windshield washer nozzles

The washer jets are automatically heated when‐
ever the ignition is switched on.
115
CONTROLS Driving
Rear window wiper Safety information
Overview WARNING
NOTE
Switching on the rear window wiper
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
Turn the outer switch upward. wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0. tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐ shield prior to switching the wipers on.
tinuous operation.
Clean the rear window Folding away the wipers

1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press and hold the wiper level down, until the
wipers stop in a close to vertical position.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The fold-out position enables the wipers to be
folded away from the windshield.
General information
Important, for instance when changing the wiper
blades or when folding out under frosty condi‐
tions.
116
Driving CONTROLS
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the

windshield. NOTE
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
Switching on
Folding down the wipers

After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper
system must be reactivated.
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐

shield.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance
resting position and are ready again for oper‐ point.
ation.
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
Canada: wiper system beyond the resistance point.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi‐
tion when released.
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as
Switching off and brief wipe
this may damage the wiper blades or cause them
to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
WARNING
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make Press the lever down.
▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press
down twice.
▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed: press
down once.
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
117
CONTROLS Driving
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi‐ 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automatically acti‐
tion when released. vated again.
Interval mode or rain sensor Setting the frequency or sensitivity

of the rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of the
rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior mirror. Without the rain
sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is
preset.
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency or
sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Safety information
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor.
NOTE
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can sensor.
accidentally start moving in vehicle washes.
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐
vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes. Windshield and headlight
washer system
Activating/deactivating Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at
low temperatures and obstruct the view. There
is a risk of an accident. Only use the washer
systems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use
antifreeze, if needed.
Press the button on the wiper lever.

NOTE
Wiping is started.
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the
If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor: the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is
LED in the wiper lever is illuminated. a risk of damage to property. Do not use the
If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper opera‐ washer system when the washer fluid reservoir
tion is deactivated. is empty.
During trip interruption with the rain sensor
switched on: if the trip is resumed within approx.
118
Driving CONTROLS
Cleaning the windshield Clean the rear window

Fold-away position of the wipers

Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ Concept
shield and activates the wipers briefly. The fold-out position enables the wipers to be
folded away from the windshield.
In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regular
intervals when the vehicle's lights are switched
on. General information
Important, for instance when changing the wiper
Windshield washer nozzles blades or when folding out under frosty condi‐
tions.
The washer jets are automatically heated when‐
ever the ignition is switched on.
Safety information
Rear window wiper
WARNING
Overview If the wipers start moving in the folded away
NOTE
Switching on the rear window wiper wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
Turn the outer switch upward. tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0.
▷ Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When reverse
gear is engaged, the system switches to con‐
tinuous operation.
119
CONTROLS Driving
Folding away the wipers Safety information

1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. With frosty conditions, make sure that the WARNING
blades are not frozen to the windshield. Some antifreeze agents can contain harmful
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of substances and are flammable. There is a risk
resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds, of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the instruc‐
until the wipers remain in a nearly vertical po‐ tions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away
sition. from ignition sources. Do not refill operating
4. Fold the wipers all the way away from the materials into different bottles. Store operating
windshield. materials out of reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid
dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage
instructions on the washer fluid container.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate
or the equivalent is recommended.
WARNING
Folding down the wipers Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on con‐
After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper tact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of in‐
system must be reactivated. jury or risk of damage to property. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
shield.
ervoir.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to their
resting position and are ready again for oper‐ NOTE
ation.
Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid
for the water-repelling effect on the windows
Washer fluid can lead to damage to the washing system.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
add silicon-containing additives to the washer
General information fluid.
All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser‐
voir.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield NOTE
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield Mixing different windshield washer concen‐
washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be trates or antifreeze can damage the washing
used. system. There is a risk of damage to property.
Recommended minimum fill quantity: Do not mix different windshield washer concen‐
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
120
Driving CONTROLS
trates or antifreeze. Follow the information and ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
mixing ratios provided on the containers. turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
Overview also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
Selector lever version
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, a trans‐
mission with either a latching selector lever or a
tap-operated selector lever is installed.
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐
gine compartment. Transmission with a latching
selector lever
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer concen‐
trate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to in‐
correct readings at temperatures below
+5 ℉/-15 ℃.
The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D are
Concept selected by moving the selector lever into the re‐
The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐ spective selector lever position. The selector
tions of an automatic transmission with the pos‐ lever engages in the selector lever positions.
sibility of manual shifting, if needed.
Transmission with a tap-operated
Safety information selector lever
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
ing.
The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D are
selected by tapping the selector lever forward or
121
CONTROLS Driving
back. The selector lever automatically returns to off, refer to page 107, while selector lever po‐
the center position when released. sition R, D or M/S is engaged.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ ▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the
cally, refer to page 122, in certain situations. driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal
is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary
and selector lever position D, M/S or R is en‐
Selector lever positions gaged.
▷ After the ignition has been switched off while
Drive mode D
selector lever position N is engaged.
Selector lever position for normal vehicle opera‐
tion. All gears for forward travel are activated au‐
Engaging selector lever
tomatically.
positions: with a latching
Reverse R selector lever
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
Neutral N select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start.
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without power,
for instance in vehicle washes, refer to
page 124, in selector lever position N.
The selector lever can only be taken out of se‐
Parking position P lector lever position P if the ignition is on or the
engine is running.
General information
Selector lever position, for instance for parking
Engaging selector lever position D,
the vehicle. N, R, or P
The transmission blocks the drive wheels in se‐ With the vehicle stationary, depress the brake
lector lever position P. pedal before shifting out of selector lever posi‐
tion P or N; otherwise, the shift block will not be
Engage selector lever position P only when the deactivated and the shift command will not be
vehicle is stationary. executed.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that selec‐ A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty
tor lever position P is set. Otherwise, the vehicle operation:
may begin to move.
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever posi‐
Automatic parking position for a tion P or R.
transmission with a tap-operated selector
lever
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally in situations such as the following:
▷ After the engine is switched off when the ve‐
hicle is in the radio-ready state, refer to
page 107, or when the ignition is switched
122
Driving CONTROLS
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever po‐ Engaging selector lever position D,
sition P into another selector lever position. N, R
1. To release the selector lever lock: with the A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty
brake pedal depressed, press the button on operation:
the front of the selector lever.
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever posi‐
tion R.
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever po‐
sition P into another selector lever position.
1. Press and hold the button to release the se‐
lector lever lock.
2. Move the selector lever into the desired posi‐

tion.
2. With the driver's safety belt fastened, briefly

push the selector lever in the desired direc‐
tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The
selector lever automatically returns to the
center position when released.
Engaging selector lever

positions: with a tap-operated
selector lever
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Only when the brake pedal is depressed is it
possible to change from selector lever position P
to another selector lever position.
Depending on the transmission version, the en‐
gine may have to be running too.
123
CONTROLS Driving
Engaging selector lever position P 4. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐
lector lever position N.
5. Switch the engine off.
In this way, the ignition remains switched on,
and a Check-Control message is displayed.
The vehicle may roll.
NOTE
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
Press button P. gaged when the ignition is switched off. There
is a risk of damage to property. Do not switch
drive-ready state off in vehicle washes.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
Irrespective of the ignition, the selector lever po‐
General information sition P is automatically engaged after approx.
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without 15 minutes.
its own power for a short distance, for instance in If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to
a vehicle wash, or be pushed. change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
Engaging selector lever position N: needed, refer to page 127.
with a latching selector lever
1. Switch on the ignition. Kickdown
2. If necessary, release the parking brake. Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
3. Depress the brake pedal. performance.
4. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐ Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resist‐
lector lever position N. ance point at the full throttle position.
5. Release brake.
Sport program M/S
The vehicle may roll.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to Concept
change the selector lever position.
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Manually unlock the transmission lock, if needed, Sport program are designed for a sportier driving
refer to page 126. style. The transmission, for instance shifts up
later and the shifting times are shorter.
Engaging selector lever position N:
with a tap-operated selector lever
1. Start the engine while pressing on the brake
pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
124
Driving CONTROLS
Activating the sport program The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, for instance M1.
Shifting
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
The transmission continues shifting automati‐
cally in certain situations, for instance when
speed limits are reached.
Press the selector lever to the left out of selector With a tap-operated selector lever: when M2 is
lever position D. set manually while the vehicle is stationary, the
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument transmission will no longer shift back to M1. This
cluster, for instance S1. shifting behavior is retained until you engage M1
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ manually or exit M.
vated.
Steptronic Sport transmission:
prevent automatic upshifting in M/S
Ending the Sport program manual mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
The Steptronic Sport transmission does not au‐
D is displayed in the instrument cluster. tomatically upshift in M/S manual mode once the
maximum speed is reached, if one of the follow‐
Manual mode M/S ing conditions is met:
▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control deactivated.
Concept ▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC activated.
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode.
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐
down.
Activating manual mode
With the appropriate transmission version, the
1. Press the selector lever to the left out of se‐ lowest possible gear can be selected by simulta‐
lector lever position D, arrow 1. neously activating kickdown and operating the
left shift paddles. This is not possible by switch‐
ing briefly via the shift paddles from selector
lever position D to manual mode M/S.
Ending the manual mode

Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it

backward, arrows 2.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
125
CONTROLS Driving
Shift paddles ▷ The lowest possible gear can be selected by

pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
Concept The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel. Displays in the instrument
cluster
General information
The selector lever position is dis‐
Shifting played, for example P.
The vehicle only shifts at suitable engine and
road speeds.
Short-term manual mode Releasing the transmission lock

In selector lever position D, actuating a shift pad‐ manually: with a latching
dle switches into manual mode temporarily. selector lever
After conservative driving in manual mode with‐ If the selector lever is locked in selector lever po‐
out acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles sition P despite the ignition being switched on,
for a certain amount of time, the transmission the brake pedal being depressed and the button
switches back to automatic mode. on the selector lever being pressed, the trans‐
It is possible to switch into automatic mode as mission lock can be unlocked manually:
follows: Before unlocking the transmission lock manually,
▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle. set the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from
rolling away.
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift pad‐
dle, briefly pull the left shift paddle. 1. Loosen the selector lever sleeve at the bot‐
tom from the center console.
Continuous manual mode
In selector lever position S, actuating a shift pad‐
dle switches into manual mode permanently.
Shifting
2. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connector, if

needed.
▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.

▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
126
Driving CONTROLS
3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard vehi‐ selector lever position N is displayed in the in‐
cle tool kit, refer to page 273, press the yel‐ strument cluster.
low release lever downward, arrow. A Check Control message is displayed.
4. Press the button on the front of the selector 4. Release the selector lever.
lever and move the selector lever back
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops.
slightly.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
Release the release lever.
and secure it against moving on its own.
5. Bring the selector lever into the desired posi‐
For additional information, see the chapter on
tion.
tow-starting and towing.
For additional information, see the chapter on
tow-starting and towing.
Steptronic Sport transmission:
Launch Control
Releasing the transmission lock
electronically: with a tap- Concept
operated selector lever Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐
General information rounding conditions.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
maneuver vehicle from a danger area. General information
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the The use of Launch Control causes premature
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling component wear since this function represents a
away. very heavy load for the vehicle.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
Engaging selector lever position N refer to page 224, period.
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the To start with Launch Control, point the front
engine. wheels straight forwards.
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must Functional requirements
audibly start. Launch Control is available as soon as the engine
3. Press the button on the selector lever, ar‐ and transmission are at operating temperature.
row 1, and press and hold the selector lever Depending on the external temperature and driv‐
into selector lever position N, arrow N, until ing style, the engine and transmission require an
interrupted trip of up to 30 miles/50 km in order
127
CONTROLS Driving
to reach the operating temperature needed for

Launch Control.
Start with launch control

While the engine is running:
1. Press the button and select SPORT

with the Driving Dynamics Control.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster in combination with SPORT and the
DSC OFF indicator light lights up.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full throttle
position, kickdown.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Repeated use during a trip

After Launch Control has been used, the trans‐
mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes
before Launch Control can be used again.
After using Launch Control

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control again.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
128
Displays CONTROLS
Displays
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Speedometer 5 Electronic displays

2 Messages, for instance Check Control 6 Fuel gauge 133
3 Tachometer 133 7 Reset miles 134
4 Current fuel consumption
129
CONTROLS Displays
Check Control Airbag system

Airbag system and belt tensioner are not
working.
Concept
Have the vehicle checked immediately
The Check Control system monitors functions in
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
service center or repair shop.
the monitored systems.
General information Parking brake

A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐ The parking brake is set.
bination of indicator or warning lights and SMS Release the parking brake, refer to
text messages in the instrument cluster and in page 112.
the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and an
Brake system
SMS text message may appear on the Control
Display. Braking system impaired. Continue to
drive moderately.
Indicator/warning lights Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer’s service center or another
General information qualified service center or repair shop.
The indicator/warning lights in the instrument
cluster can light up in a variety of combinations Approach control warning
and colors.
Indicator light illuminates: advance warn‐
Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐ ing is issued, for example when there is
tioning and light up temporarily when the engine the impending danger of a collision or
is started or the ignition is switched on. the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Increase distance.
Red lights
Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the immi‐
Safety belt reminder nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another vehicle at a relatively high dif‐
Safety belt on the driver's side is not ferential speed.
buckled. For some country versions: pas‐
Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐
senger belt is not worn or objects are de‐
neuver.
tected on the front passenger seat.
Indicator light flashes or is illuminated: safety belt
on the driver or passenger side is not buckled. Person warning
The safety belt reminder can also be activated if Symbol in the instrument cluster.
objects are placed on the front passenger seat.
If a collision with a person detected in
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned this way is imminent, the symbol lights
correctly. up and a signal sounds.
130
Displays CONTROLS
Orange lights DSC Dynamic Stability Control is

deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
Active Cruise Control Control is activated
The number bars shows the selected DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.
distance from the vehicle driving ahead. DSC, refer to page 171, and DTC, refer
Camera-based cruise control with to page 173.
Stop&Go function, ACC, refer to page 177.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle has tire inflation pressure in a tire.
been detected ahead of you. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Indicator light flashes: the conditions are Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
not adequate for the system to work. Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 158.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
The indicator light lights up: the Tire
Pressure Monitor reports a low tire infla‐
Yellow lights tion pressure or a flat tire. Follow the in‐
formation in the Check Control message.
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
The indicator light flashes and then continuously
Braking force boost may not be working. lights up: no flat tire or loss of tire inflation pres‐
Avoid abrupt braking. Take the longer sure can be detected.
braking distance into account. ▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
Have the system immediately checked with the same radio frequency: after leaving
by a dealer’s service center or another the area of the interference, the system auto‐
qualified service center or repair shop. matically becomes active again.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re‐
DSC Dynamic Stability Control set the system again.
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls ▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
the drive and braking forces. The vehicle mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐
is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify ice center or another qualified service center
your driving style to the driving circumstances. or repair shop as needed.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐ ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
tioned. dealer’s service center or another qualified
Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐ Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 153.
pair shop.
DSC, refer to page 171. Steering system
Steering system in some cases not
working.
131
CONTROLS Displays
Have the system checked by a dealer’s service Front fog lights

center or another qualified service center or re‐
Front fog lights are switched on.
pair shop.
Front fog lights, refer to page 148.
Emissions
High-beam Assistant
▷ The warning light lights up:
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible. High beams are switched on and off au‐
tomatically depending on the traffic sit‐
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
uation.
cumstances:
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 147.
This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐ Cruise control
tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious The system is switched on. It maintains
engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐ the speed that was set using the control
ously damage emission control components, elements on the steering wheel.
in particular the catalytic converter.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to Blue lights

page 272.
High beams
Lane departure warning High beams are switched on.
System is switched on and under certain High beams, refer to page 113.
circumstances warns if a detected lane is
left without flashing beforehand.
Lane departure warning, refer to page 167.
Hiding Check Control messages
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb has
failed.
Turn signal, refer to page 113. Press and hold button on signal lever.
Parking lights, headlight Continuous display

Parking lights or headlights are switched Some Check Control messages are displayed
on. continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions oc‐
Parking lights/low beams, headlight con‐
cur at once, the messages are displayed consec‐
trol, refer to page 145.
utively.
132
Displays CONTROLS
The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐ Display additional information about the
onds. After this time, they are displayed again Check Control message in the Integrated
automatically. Owner's Manual.
▷ "Service request"
Temporary display Contact a dealer’s service center or another
Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐ qualified service center or repair shop.
matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check
▷ "BMW Roadside Assistance"
Control messages are stored and can be dis‐
played again later. Contact Roadside Assistance.
Displaying stored Check Control Messages after trip completion

messages Special messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after the ignition is switched off.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
Fuel gauge
3. "Check Control"
An arrow beside the fuel pump
4. Select the SMS text message. symbol shows which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Display Vehicle tilt position may cause the
display to vary.
Check Control Follow the information on refueling.
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored. The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
SMS text messages

SMS text messages in combination with a sym‐
bol in the instrument cluster explain a Check
Tachometer
Control message and the meaning of the indica‐
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
tor/warning lights.
field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to
protect the engine.
Supplementary SMS text messages
Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up Odometer and trip
via Check Control.
odometer
With urgent messages the added text will be au‐
tomatically displayed on the Control Display.
Display
Functions ▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
Depending on the Check Control message, the ▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
following functions can be selected.
▷ "Owner's Manual"
133
CONTROLS Displays
Show/reset miles Time

Press the button.
The time is displayed in the in‐
▷ When the ignition is switched
strument cluster.
off, the time, the external tem‐
perature and the odometer are The time can be set on the Con‐
displayed. trol Display.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip od‐
ometer is reset.
Date
External temperature The date is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
General information The date can be set on the Con‐

trol Display.
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a
signal sounds.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Range
Safety information General information

With a low remaining range:
WARNING ▷ A Check Control message is displayed briefly.
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃ ▷ The remaining range is shown on the On‐
there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on board Computer.
bridges or shady sections of road. There is a ▷ With a dynamic driving style, for instance tak‐
risk of an accident. Modify your driving style to ing curves aggressively, the engine function
the weather conditions at low temperatures. is not always ensured.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Display
The external temperature is dis‐ Safety information
played in the instrument cluster.
NOTE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property. Refuel promptly.
134
Displays CONTROLS
Display Energy recovery

The current range is displayed in
the instrument cluster. Display
In coasting overrun mode the ki‐
netic energy of the vehicle is con‐
verted to electrical energy. The
vehicle battery is partially charged
Current fuel consumption and fuel consumption can be re‐
duced.
Instrument cluster
Displays the current fuel con‐ Service requirements
sumption. Check whether you are
currently driving in an efficient and
environmentally-friendly manner. Concept
The function displays the service requirements
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
Instrument cluster with
enhanced features General information
Displays the current fuel con‐ After the ignition is switched on the instrument
sumption. Check whether you are cluster briefly displays available driving distance
currently driving in an efficient and or time to the next scheduled maintenance.
environmentally-friendly manner. A service advisor can read out the current serv‐
ice requirements from your remote control.
Displaying the current fuel Display

consumption
Depending on your vehicle's optional features, Detailed information on service
the current fuel consumption can also be dis‐ requirements
played as bar in the instrument cluster. More information on the type of service required
Via iDrive: may be displayed on the Control Display.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings" 1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Displays" 2. "Vehicle status"
4. "Instrument panel" 3. "Service required"
5. "Additional indicators" Required maintenance procedures and le‐

gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed information.
135
CONTROLS Displays
Symbols Gear shift indicator

Symbols Description
Concept
No service is currently required.
The system recommends the most fuel efficient
gear for the current driving situation.
The deadline for scheduled
maintenance or a legally man‐ General information
dated inspection is approaching. Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, the gear shift indicator is active in the
The service deadline has already manual mode of the Steptronic transmission and
passed. with manual transmission.
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
Entering appointment dates played in the instrument cluster.
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐ On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the en‐
spections. gaged gear is displayed.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are

set correctly. Steptronic transmission:
Via iDrive:
displaying
1. "My Vehicle" Example Description

2. "Vehicle status" Fuel efficient gear is set.
3. "Service required"
4. "Vehicle inspection"
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
5. "Date:"
Automatic Service Request

Data regarding the service status or legally man‐
Speed Limit Info
dated vehicle inspections is automatically trans‐
mitted to your dealer’s service center before your Speed Limit Info
vehicle is due for service.
You can check when your dealer’s service center Concept
was notified. Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
Via iDrive: permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
1. "My Vehicle" General information

2. "Vehicle status" The camera in the area of the interior mirror de‐
3. "Teleservice Call" tects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well
as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic signs
with extra symbols for wet road conditions, etc.,
are also detected and compared with the vehi‐
136
Displays CONTROLS
cle's onboard data, such as from the rain sensor, Display

and will be displayed depending on the situation.
With the navigation system, the system takes General information
into account the information stored in the naviga‐ Speed Limit Info is permanently displayed in the
tion data and also displays speed limits present instrument cluster.
on routes without signs.
Without a navigation system, the system is sub‐ Speed Limit Info
ject to limitations imposed by technology. Traffic
The last speed limit detected.
signs with speed limitations are detected and
displayed only. Speed limitations due to entering Without a navigation system the
or exiting towns, highway signs, etc. are not dis‐ traffic signals are grayed out after
played. Speed limits with extra text characters curves or longer stretches of
are always displayed. roadway.
With navigation system:

Safety information
Speed Limit Info not available.
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility Without navigation system:
and traffic situation. There is a risk of an acci‐
No speed limit or cancellation de‐
dent. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
tected.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in the
Head-up Display.
Overview
System limits
Camera
The system may not be fully functional and may
provide incorrect information in the following sit‐
uations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed by
objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
The camera is installed near the interior mirror. reflections.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
clean and clear. mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
137
CONTROLS Displays
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation Activating a list and adjusting
system are incorrect. the setting
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such
as due to changes in road routing.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed
sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn the
▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road
thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list.
are detected.
1. Turn the thumbwheel and select the desired
setting.
Selection lists 2. Press the thumbwheel.
General information Display

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the fol‐
lowing can be displayed or operated using the
buttons and the thumbwheel on the steering
wheel as well as the displays in the instrument
cluster and the Head-up Display:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
Depending on the equipment version, the list in

the instrument cluster may differ from the illus‐
tration.
Onboard Computer
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different vehi‐
cle data in the instrument cluster, such as aver‐
age values.
138
Displays CONTROLS
Calling up information on the Info Selecting information

Display You can select what information from the On‐
board Computer is to be displayed on the Info
Display of the instrument cluster.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Information is displayed in the Info Display of the Indication in the Info Display
instrument cluster. Pressing the button repeat‐
The information from the On‐
edly displays additional information.
board Computer is shown in the
Info Display in the instrument
Information at a glance cluster.
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn sig‐
nal lever calls up the following information in the
Info Display: Information in detail
▷ Range.
Range
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
Displays the estimated cruising range available
▷ Current consumption, fuel. with the remaining fuel.
▷ Average speed. The range is calculated based on your driving
▷ Date. style over the last 20 miles/30 km.
▷ Engine temperature display.
▷ Speed.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
▷ Depending on the equipment, the time of ar‐
the period while the engine is running.
rival.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
When destination guidance is activated in the
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
navigation system.
Onboard Computer.
▷ Depending on the equipment, the distance to
destination.
Average speed
When destination guidance is activated in the
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
navigation system.
engine manually stopped are not included in the
▷ ECO PRO bonus range. calculation of the average speed.
139
CONTROLS Displays
Resetting average values Onboard Computer on the

Control Display
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different vehi‐
cle data on the Control Display, such as average
values.
General information
Two types of Onboard Computers are available
Press and hold button on turn signal lever. on the Control Display:
▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as the
Engine temperature display fuel consumption, are displayed. The values
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the current can be reset individually.
engine temperature is displayed, based on a ▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an over‐
combination of the coolant temperature and en‐ view of a certain distance and can be reset as
gine oil temperature. As soon as the optimum often as necessary.
operating temperature has been attained, the in‐
dicator is in the center position. Calling up the Onboard Computer or
If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the engine, trip computer
become too hot, a Check Control message is Via iDrive:
displayed too.
1. "My Vehicle"
Check the coolant level, refer to page 269.
2. "Driving information"
Distance to destination 3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the dis‐
tance remaining to the destination is displayed if Resetting the Onboard Computer
a destination is entered in the navigation system Via iDrive:
before the trip is started.
1. "My Vehicle"
The distance to the destination is adopted auto‐
2. "Driving information"
matically.
3. "Onboard info"
Time of arrival 4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
Depending on the vehicle equip‐ 5. "OK"

ment, the estimated time of arrival
is displayed if a destination is en‐ Resetting the trip computer
tered in the navigation system be‐ Via iDrive:
fore the trip is started.
1. "My Vehicle"
The time must be correctly set. 2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip computer"
4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
140
Displays CONTROLS
▷ "Reset": all values are reset. Checking vehicle state

▷ "Automatic reset": all values are reset Via iDrive:
approx. 4 hours after the vehicle has
come to a standstill. 1. "My Vehicle"
5. If necessary, "OK" 2. "Technology in action"

3. "Vehicle and surroundings"
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
Sport displays
1. Activate SPORT.
2. "Sport displays"
Concept
On the Control Display, sport instruments can be
displayed, and the vehicle state can be checked Speed warning
before the use of the SPORT program.
Sport instruments Concept

A speed limit can be set that when reached will
General information cause a warning to be issued.
On the Control Display, values for power and tor‐

que are displayed. General information
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐
Displaying sport instruments ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐
ped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" Displaying, setting or changing
2. "Technology in action" the speed warning
3. "Sports instruments" Via iDrive:
Via the Driving Dynamics Control 1. "My Vehicle"
1. Activate SPORT. 2. "Vehicle settings"
2. "Sport displays" 3. "Speed warning"
4. "Warning at:"
Vehicle state 5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is
displayed.
General information
The following vehicle and environment data is
evaluated:
▷ Engine temperature.
speed warning
▷ External temperature.
Via iDrive:
▷ Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure.
1. "My Vehicle"
Tire temperature and tire filling pressure are de‐
termined while driving. 2. "Vehicle settings"
141
CONTROLS Displays
3. "Speed warning" Display

4. "Speed warning"
Overview
Setting your current speed as The following information is displayed on the
the speed warning Head-up Display:
Via iDrive: ▷ Speed.
1. "My Vehicle" ▷ Navigation instructions.
2. "Vehicle settings" ▷ Check Control messages.
3. "Speed warning" ▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.
4. "Select current speed" ▷ Driver assistance systems.

Some of this information is only displayed briefly
as needed.
Head-up Display
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Concept Display
This system projects important information into Via iDrive:
the driver's field of vision, for instance the speed. 1. "My Vehicle"
The driver can quickly absorb information and 2. "iDrive settings"
concentrate on the traffic situation.
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
Overview
5. "Displayed information"
Setting the brightness

The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
Via iDrive:
Switching on/off 1. "My Vehicle"
Via iDrive: 2. "iDrive settings"
1. "My Vehicle" 3. "Displays"
2. "iDrive settings" 4. "Head-Up Display"
3. "Displays" 5. "Brightness"
4. "Head-Up Display" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
142
Displays CONTROLS
When the low beams are switched on, the ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi‐ ▷ Wet roads.
tionally influenced using the instrument lighting.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the basic settings
checked by a dealer’s service center or another
Adjusting the height qualified service center or repair shop.
Via iDrive:
Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-up
1. "My Vehicle" Display, refer to page 292.
3. "Displays"
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible to
5. "Height"
display a precise image.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is
A film in the windshield prevents double images
reached.
from being displayed.
For this reason, it is strongly suggested to have
Settings are stored for the profile currently used. the special windshield replaced by a dealer’s
The height of the Head-up Display can also be service center or another qualified service center
stored using the memory function, refer to or repair shop, if necessary.
page 98.
Setting the rotation Vehicle status

The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐
tated around its own axis. General information
Via iDrive: The status can be displayed and actions per‐
formed for several systems.
1. "My Vehicle"
Opening the vehicle status
3. "Displays"
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
5. "Rotation"
2. "Vehicle status"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
selected.
Information at a glance
▷ "Flat Tire Monitor": status of the Flat Tire
Settings are stored for the profile currently used. Monitor, refer to page 158.
▷ "Tire Pressure Monitor": status of the Tire
Display visibility
Pressure Monitor, refer to page 153.
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
▷ "Engine oil level": Electronic engine oil
play is influenced by the following factors:
level check, refer to page 265.
▷ Certain sitting positions.
▷ "Check Control": Check Control mes‐
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Display. sages are stored in the background and can
143
CONTROLS Displays
be displayed on the Control Display. Display‐

ing stored Check Control messages, refer to
page 133.
▷ "Service required": Displaying service
requirements, refer to page 135.
▷ "Teleservice Call": service request.
144
Lights CONTROLS
Lights
Vehicle features and Symbol Function
options Parking lights.

cific and optional features offered with the series. Low beams.
options or country versions. This also applies to Instrument lighting.
Parking lights, low beams

Overview and roadside parking lights
Switches in the vehicle General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver's door is opened when the ignition is
switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically
switched off.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
The light switch element is located next to the Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐
steering wheel. ods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and
it would then be impossible to start the engine.
Symbol Function Canada: when parking, switch on the one-sided
roadside parking light, refer to page 146.
Front fog lights.
Low beams
Automatic headlight control. Position of switch:
Cornering light. The low beams light up when the ignition is
switched on.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
145
CONTROLS Lights
Canada: roadside parking light 3. "Lighting"

4. "Exterior lighting"
Concept 5. "Welcome lights"
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Switching on
Headlight courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay lit for a short while if the
headlight flasher is switched on after the radio-
ready state is switched off.
Setting the duration

Via iDrive:
With radio-ready state switched off, press the
lever either up or down past the resistance point 1. "My Vehicle"
for approx. 2 seconds. 2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
Switching off 4. "Exterior lighting"
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in 5. "Pathway lighting"
the opposite direction. 6. Set length of time.
Welcome lights and rently used.
headlight courtesy delay

feature Automatic headlight
control
Welcome lights
Concept
General information The low beams are switched on and off automat‐
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the ically depending on the ambient brightness, for
ambient brightness, individual light functions may instance in tunnels, in twilight or if there is pre‐
be switched on briefly when the vehicle is un‐ cipitation.
locked.
General information
Activating/deactivating A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
Position of switch: , cause the lights to be switched on.
Via iDrive: The low beams always stay on when the fog light
1. "My Vehicle" is switched on.
146
Lights CONTROLS
Activating Adaptive headlight range

Position of switch:
control
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is il‐
luminated when the low beams are switched on. The adaptive headlight range control compen‐
sates for acceleration and braking operations in
System limits order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to
The automatic headlight control cannot serve as achieve optimum illumination of the roadway.
a substitute for your personal judgment of light‐
ing conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
High-beam Assistant
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under
these conditions, you should always switch on Concept
the lights manually. The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically switches
the high beams on or off depending on the traffic
Daytime running lights situation.
General information General information

Position of switch: , , The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high
The daytime running lights light up when the ig‐ beams are switched on, whenever the traffic sit‐
nition is switched on. After the ignition is uation allows. In the low speed range, the high
switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐ beams are not switched on by the system.
tion . The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to am‐
bient lighting, for instance in towns and cities.
Cornering light The high beams can be switched on and off
manually at any time.
General information
Position of switch: Activating/deactivating
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
roads or when turning, an additional, cornering
light is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed.
The cornering light is automatically switched on
depending on the steering angle or the use of
turn signals.
Position of switch, depending on the vehicle

equipment: ,
Press and hold button on signal lever.
147
CONTROLS Lights
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐

ter is illuminated when the low beams are
Fog lights
switched on.
Front fog lights
The headlights are automatically switched be‐
tween low beams and high beams. Concept
The blue indicator light in the instrument The front fog lights work alongside the low
cluster lights up when the system beams to illuminate a wider area of the roadway.
switches on the high beams.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when
manually switching the high beams on and off, The low beams must be switched on before
refer to page 113. switching on the front fog lights.
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the

Switching on/off
button on the turn signal lever.
Press button.
System limits The green indicator light lights up if the
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a sub‐ front fog lights are switched on.
stitute for the driver's personal judgment of when
If the automatic headlight control, refer to
to use the high beams. In situation that require
page 146, is activated, the low beams will come
this, therefore switch off manually.
on automatically when you switch on the front
The system is not fully functional in the following fog lights.
situations, and driver intervention may be neces‐
When the high beams or headlight flasher are
sary:
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such on.
as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and Instrument lighting
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
The parking lights or low beams must be
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
switched on to adjust the brightness.
traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the pres‐ Settings
ence of highly reflective signs.
Adjust the brightness with the
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
thumbwheel.
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
148
Lights CONTROLS
Interior lights Ambient light
General information
General information
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
Depending on the equipment, the interior lights, can be adjusted for some lights in the car's inte‐
footwell lights, entry lights, and courtesy lights rior.
are controlled automatically.
Thumbwheel for the instrument lighting controls Selecting color scheme
brightness of some of these features.
Via iDrive:
Overview 1. "My Vehicle"

3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Lighting design"
To deactivate the ambient light: "Off".
Setting the brightness

1 Interior lights Via iDrive:
2 Reading lights 1. "My Vehicle"
Switching the interior lights 3. "Lighting"
on/off 4. "Interior lighting"
Press button. 5. "Brightness"
6. Adjust the brightness.
To switch off permanently: press the button and
hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Switching the reading lights

on/off
Press button.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read‐

ing lights are located next to the interior lights in
the front and rear.
149
CONTROLS Safety
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag
3 Head airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and the In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
front passenger by responding to frontal impacts side of the body in the chest and lap area.
in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate protection. Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the
head.
150
Safety CONTROLS
Ejection Mitigation ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front pas‐

The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐ senger side must stay clear - do not attach
tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the adhesive labels or coverings and do not at‐
likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants tach brackets or cables, for instance for GPS
through side windows during rollovers or side im‐ devices or mobile phones.
pact events. ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag
cover panels, do not cover them or modify
Knee airbag them in any way.
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal im‐ ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
pact. the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
Protective action other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not specifically suited for seats with
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
integrated side airbags.
tion, for instance in less severe accidents or rear-
end collisions. ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐
ets, over the backrests.
Information on optimum effect of the ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
airbags nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
also applies to steering wheel covers, the
dashboard, and the seats.
WARNING
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag Even when you follow all instructions very
system cannot provide protection as intended closely, injury from contact with the airbags can‐
and may cause additional injuries due to trig‐ not be fully ruled out in certain situations.
gering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
life. Follow the information on achieving the op‐ short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
timum protective effect of the airbag system. ing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags. ties may affect the air bag system; contact BMW
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the Customer Relations for further information.
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the Warnings and information on the airbags are also
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the found on the sun visors.
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as
possible when the airbag is triggered. Functional readiness of the
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads airbag system
away from the side airbag.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting Safety information
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in
the floor area and does not support them on
WARNING
the dashboard.
Individual components can be hot after trigger‐
▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐
ing of the airbag system. There is a risk of in‐
mals or objects between an airbag and a per‐
jury. Do not touch individual components.
son.
151
CONTROLS Safety
Safety information
WARNING
Improperly executed work can lead to failure, WARNING
malfunction or unintentional triggering of the
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag
airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the
function, the system must be able to detect
airbag system might not trigger as intended de‐
whether a person is sitting in the front passen‐
spite the accident severity. There is a risk of in‐
ger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be
juries or danger to life. Have the airbag system
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries
checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by
or danger to life. Make sure that the front pas‐
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
senger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.
Malfunction of the automatic

Correct function
deactivation system
When the ignition is switched on, the
When transporting older children and adults, the
warning light in the instrument cluster
front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated
lights up briefly and thereby indicates the
in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi‐
operational readiness of the entire airbag system
cator light for the front-seat passenger airbags
and the belt tensioner.
lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
Airbag system malfunctioning the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
▷ Warning light does not come on when the ig‐ and the indicator light goes out.
nition is switched on. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
▷ The warning light lights up continuously. the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
Automatic deactivation of the seat cushion.
front-seat passenger airbags ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat un‐
Concept less they are specifically determined to be
The system reads if the front passenger seat is safe for use on the front passenger seat.
occupied by measuring the human body's resist‐ ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
ance. front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐ tem is to be installed on it.
senger's side are activated or deactivated. ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
General information ▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
152
Safety CONTROLS
Indicator light for the front-seat Strength of the driver's and

passenger airbags front-seat passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/front-
seat passenger airbags very much depends on
the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon as
a respective message appears on the Control
Display.
Calibrating the front seats

The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbags indicates the operating state of the front-
WARNING
seat passenger airbags.
The light indicates whether the airbags are either
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
activated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator light lights up ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
when a child is properly ment.
seated in a child restraint sys‐
tem or when the seat is A corresponding message appears on the Con‐
empty. The airbags on the trol Display.
front passenger side are not
1. Press the switch and move the respective
activated.
seat all the way forward, until it stops.
▷ The indicator light does not light up when, for
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat still
instance a correctly seated person of suffi‐
moves forward slightly.
cient size is detected on the seat. The air‐
bags on the front passenger side are acti‐ 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
vated. The calibration procedure is completed when the
message on the Control Display disappears.
Detected child restraint systems If the message continues to be displayed, repeat
The system generally detects children seated in the calibration.
a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐ If the message does not disappear after a repeat
straint systems required by NHTSA at the point calibration, have the system checked as soon as
in time when the vehicle was manufactured. Af‐ possible.
ter installing a child restraint system, make sure
that the indicator light for the front-seat passen‐
ger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
restraint system has been detected and the
front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.
Concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the
four mounted tires. The system warns you if
there is a significant loss of pressure in one or
more tires.
153
CONTROLS Safety
General information All wheels green

Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire infla‐ System is active and will issue a warning related
tion pressure and, depending on the model, the to the tire inflation pressures stored during the
tire temperature. last reset.
With use of the system follow further information
found under Tire inflation pressure, refer to One to four yellow wheels
page 244. A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation pres‐
sure has occurred in the indicated tires.
The following conditions must be met for the Gray wheels
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of It may not be possible to identify tire pressure
tire inflation pressure is not assured: losses.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset was Possible causes:
performed with the correct tire inflation pres‐ ▷ Malfunction.
sure.
▷ The system is being reset.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was adjusted
to a new value, a reset was performed. Additonal information
▷ Wheels with TPM wheel electronics. The status control display additionally shows the
current tire inflation pressures and, depending on
Status display the model, tire temperatures. It shows the actual
values read; they may vary depending on driving
Current status style or weather conditions.
The system status can be displayed on the Con‐
trol Display, e.g., whether or not the system is ac‐ Resetting the system
tive. Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle status"
2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" 4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
The current status is displayed. 5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform reset".
6. Drive away.
Tire conditions
The wheels are displayed in gray and the follow‐
ing is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure
General information Monitor…".
Tire and system status are indicated by the color
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
of the wheels and a SMS text message on the
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
Control Display.
accepted as reference values. The reset is com‐
pleted automatically while driving.
After a successfully completed reset, the wheels
on the Control Display are shown in green and
154
Safety CONTROLS
"Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label for Measure

recommended pressures." is displayed. 1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you needed.
continue the reset resumes automatically. 2. Reset the system.
Messages If the tire inflation pressure is too

low
General information
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC Message
Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on. A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
Safety information
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐
sage appears on the Control Display.
WARNING
A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire Symbol Possible cause
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as
There is a tire inflation pressure loss.
steering and braking response. Run-flat tires
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of No reset was performed for the sys‐
an accident. Do not continue driving if the vehi‐ tem. The system issues a warning
cle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the in‐ based on the tire inflation pressures
formation on run-flat tires and continued driving stored during the last reset.
with these tires.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and drive moderately. Do
If a tire inflation pressure check is not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
required
2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas sta‐
tion, check and correct the tire inflation pres‐
Message
sure in all four tires, if necessary.
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐
3. Reset the system.
pears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause If there is a significant loss of tire
The system has detected a wheel inflation pressure
change, but no reset was done.
Message
No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning A yellow warning light is illuminated in
based on the tire inflation pressures the instrument cluster.
stored during the last reset.
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐
Inflation was not carried out accord‐ pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
ing to specifications. trol Display.
The tire inflation pressure has fallen
below the level of the last reset.
155
CONTROLS Safety
Symbol Possible cause Run-flat tires

There is a flat tire or a major loss in Safety information
tire inflation pressure.
No reset was performed for the sys‐
WARNING
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat
stored during the last reset. with no or low inflation pressure; for instance,
your lane stability when braking is reduced,
braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐
Measure
ing properties will change. There is a risk of an
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. accident.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
vers.
50 mph/80 km/h.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐
mal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 251, are labeled Maximum speed
with a circular symbol containing the letters You may continue driving with a damaged tire at
RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Actions in the event of a flat tire Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
Normal tires
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
1. Identify the damaged tire. vers.
To do this, check the air pressure in all four 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
of a flat tire kit.
next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not
have been reset. In this case, perform the re‐
have been reset. In this case, perform the re‐
set.
set.
If identification of flat tire damage is not pos‐
sible, please contact a dealer’s service center Possible driving range with a
or another qualified service center or repair depressurized tire
shop.
The distance for which it may be possible to
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle
changing the wheel. is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions,
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit, external temperature. The driving range may be
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this less but may also be more if an economical driv‐
case, have the electronics checked and replaced ing style is used.
at the next opportunity. If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐
tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up
to 50 miles/80 km.
156
Safety CONTROLS
Vehicle handling with damaged tires Malfunction

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle The yellow warning light flashes and is
differently, potentially leading to conditions such then illuminated continuously. A Check
as the following: Control message is displayed. It may not
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course. be possible to identify tire pressure losses.
▷ Longer braking distances.
Examples and recommendations in the following
▷ Changed self-steering properties. situations:
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering ▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐
curbs or potholes. ice center or another qualified service center
or repair shop as needed.
Final tire failure
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics, for
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ instance an emergency wheel, is mounted:
cate the final failure of a tire. have it checked by a dealer’s service center
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the or another qualified service center or repair
tire could come loose and cause an accident. shop as needed.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐ ▷ Malfunction: have system checked by a deal‐
ice center or another qualified service center or er’s service center or another qualified serv‐
repair shop. ice center or repair shop.
▷ The system was unable to complete the re‐
System limits set. Perform a system reset again.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
Temperature with the same radio frequency: after leaving
The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's the area of the interference, the system auto‐
temperature. matically becomes active again.
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the
tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire infla‐ Declaration according to NHTSA/
tion pressure. FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the Monitoring System
tire temperature falls again. Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should
These circumstances may cause a warning be checked monthly when cold and inflated to
when temperatures fall very sharply. the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi‐
cle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire in‐
Sudden tire pressure loss flation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the ve‐
The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire hicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
damage caused by external circumstances. should determine the proper tire inflation pres‐
sure for those tires.) As an added safety feature,
Failure to perform a reset your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres‐
The system does not function properly if a reset sure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
has not been carried out, for instance a flat tire is a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
reported though tire inflation pressures are cor‐ your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord‐
rect. ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi‐
157
CONTROLS Safety
nates, you should stop and check your tires as The system does not measure the actual infla‐
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper tion pressure in the tires.
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to Functional requirements
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi‐
The following conditions must be met for the
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi‐
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
cle's handling and stopping ability. Please note
tire inflation pressure is not assured:
that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initializa‐
to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under- tion was performed with the correct tire infla‐
inflation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐ tion pressure.
mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. ▷ After the tire inflation pressure was adjusted
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a to a new value, an initialization was per‐
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the formed.
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low Status display
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
The current status of the flat tire monitor can be
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐
displayed, for instance whether the RPA is active.
mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon Via iDrive:
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
function exists. When the malfunction indicator is
2. "Vehicle status"
illuminated, the system may not be able to de‐
tect or signal low tire pressure as intended. 3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of The status is displayed.
reasons, including the installation of replacement
or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that Initialization required
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Al‐
An initialization must be performed in the follow‐
ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
ing situations:
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your ve‐
hicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate ▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been ad‐
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to justed.
function properly. ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
Performing initialization
FTM Flat Tire Monitor When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures
serve as reference values in order to detect a flat
Concept tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss inflation pressures.
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐ Do not initialize the system when driving with
tween the individual wheels while driving. snow chains.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the Via iDrive:
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
ence will be detected and reported as a flat tire. 2. "Vehicle status"
158
Safety CONTROLS
3. "Flat Tire Monitor" Measure

4. Start the engine but do not drive off. 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset" Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
6. Drive away.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐
The initialization is completed while driving,
mal tires or run-flat tires.
which can be interrupted at any time.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 251, are labeled
The initialization automatically continues when
with a circular symbol containing the letters
driving resumes.
RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
Messages
Actions in the event of a flat tire
General information
Normal tires
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
1. Identify the damaged tire.
bility Control is switched on, if needed.
To do this, check the air pressure in all four
Safety information tires, for instance using the tire pressure gage
of a flat tire kit.
WARNING
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have
A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire been initialized. In this case, initialize the sys‐
inflation pressure impacts handling, such as tem.
steering and braking response. Run-flat tires
If identification of flat tire damage is not pos‐
can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of
sible, please contact a dealer’s service center
an accident. Do not continue driving if the vehi‐
or another qualified service center or repair
cle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the in‐
shop.
formation on run-flat tires and continued driving
with these tires. 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by
changing the wheel.
Indication of a flat tire Run-flat tires

A yellow warning light is illuminated in
Safety information
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ WARNING

sage appears on the Control Display.
Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat
Symbol Possible cause with no or low inflation pressure; for instance,
your lane stability when braking is reduced,
There is a flat tire or a major loss in braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐
tire inflation pressure. ing properties will change. There is a risk of an
accident.
50 mph/80 km/h.
159
CONTROLS Safety
Maximum speed Final tire failure

You may continue driving with a damaged tire at Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. cate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the
Continued driving with a flat tire tire could come loose and cause an accident.
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ ice center or another qualified service center or
vers. repair shop.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

System limits
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the
next opportunity. The system could be delayed or malfunction in
the following situations:
correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have ▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in
been initialized. In this case, initialize the sys‐ all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
tem. check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐
Possible driving range with a nal circumstances cannot be recognized in
depressurized tire advance.
The distance for which it may be possible to ▷ When the system has not been initialized.
drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road sur‐
is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, face.
external temperature. The driving range may be
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction wheels,
less but may also be more if an economical driv‐
high lateral acceleration (drifting).
ing style is used.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐
tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up
to 50 miles/80 km.
Intelligent Safety
Vehicle handling with damaged tires Concept

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the
differently, potentially leading to conditions such driver assistance system. Depending on how the
as the following: vehicle is equipped, Intelligent Safety consists of
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course. one or more systems that can help prevent an
imminent collision.
▷ Longer braking distances.
▷ Approach control warning with City light brak‐
▷ Changed self-steering properties. ing function, refer to page 161.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering ▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 164.
maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance
curbs or potholes. ▷ Lane departure warning, refer to page 167.
160
Safety CONTROLS
Safety information Intelligent Safety button
WARNING Switching on/off

Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting.
where appropriate. Press button briefly:
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
WARNING are individually switched off accord‐
ing to their respective settings.
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due ▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to its limits, the system might not output warn‐ to their individual settings.
ings or reactions or these might be output late, Adjust as needed. Individual settings are stored
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a for the profile currently used.
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ Press button again:
tervene where appropriate. ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on.
▷ The LED lights up green.
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions can Hold down button:
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a switched off.
risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety ▷ The LED goes out.
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview Approach control warning

with city light braking
Button in the vehicle
function
Concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an ac‐
cident cannot be prevented, the system will help
reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and activates brakes independ‐
ently, if needed.
161
CONTROLS Safety
The automatic braking intervention is done with

limited force and duration. WARNING
A camera in the area of the interior mirror con‐ Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
trols the system. stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
The approach control warning is available even if to its limits, the system might not output warn‐
cruise control has been deactivated. ings or reactions or these might be output late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle in‐
tentionally, the approach control warning and
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
tervene where appropriate.
tem reactions.
General information
WARNING
The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx. Due to system limits, individual functions can
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
the current driving situation. Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
35 mph/60 km/h.
Detection range Overview
Objects that the system can detect are taken

into account.
Intelligent Safety button

Safety information
WARNING
where appropriate.
162
Safety CONTROLS
Camera Setting the warning time

The warning time can be set.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Warning time"
The camera is installed near the interior mirror. The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐
rently used.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Warning with braking function
Switching on/off Display

A warning symbol appears in the instrument
Switching on automatically cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision
The system is automatically active after every with a detected vehicle is imminent.
driving off.
Symbol Measure
Switching on/off manually Symbol lights up red: prewarning.

Press button briefly: Brake and increase distance.
▷ The menu for the intelligent safety Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
system is displayed. The systems signal sounds: acute warning.
are individually switched off accord‐
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to their individual settings.
Prewarning
Adjust as needed. The individual settings are
This warning is issued, for instance when there is
stored for the driver profile currently in use.
the impending danger of a collision or the dis‐
Press button again: tance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are The driver must intervene actively when there is
switched on. a prewarning.

Acute warning with braking function
Hold down button: Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
proaches another object at a high differential
switched off.
speed.
▷ The LED goes out.
The driver must intervene actively when there is
an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is as‐
163
CONTROLS Safety
sisted by a minor automatic braking intervention ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
in a possible risk of collision. them at high speed.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
previous forewarning. or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
Braking intervention ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
The warning prompts the driver to react. During
a warning, the maximum braking force is used. Functional limitations
Prerequisite for the brake booster is sufficiently
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal. If
lowing situations:
there is a risk of collision, the system may assist
with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete ▷ In tight curves.
stop. ▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle activated, for instance DSC OFF.
stability has not been restricted, for instance by ▷ If the field of view of the camera in the mirror
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control. is dirty or obscured.
The driver may cancel the braking intervention ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ via the Start/Stop button.
tively moving the steering wheel.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the after vehicle delivery.
limitations of the detection range and functional
restrictions. ▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
System limits
Warning sensitivity
Safety information
The more sensitive the warning settings are, for
example the warning time, the more warnings are
WARNING displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐
The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐ cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐
rectly, or without justification due to the system actions.
limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
damage to property. Follow the information re‐
garding the system limits and actively intervene Person warning with City
if needed. light braking function
Detection range Concept

The system's detection potential is limited. The system can help prevent accidents with pe‐
Thus, a system reaction might not come or destrians.
might come late. When driving at city speeds, the system will is‐
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐ sue a warning if there is imminent risk of a colli‐
tected: sion with pedestrians, and support this with a
light braking function.
164
Safety CONTROLS
The camera in the area of the interior mirror con‐ Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
trols the system. where appropriate.
General information
With sufficient brightness, the system warns WARNING
about possible collision danger with pedestrians Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx. stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking before to its limits, the system might not output warn‐
a collision. ings or reactions or these might be output late,
The system reacts to people who are within the incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
detection range of the system. risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
Detection range tervene where appropriate.
WARNING
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐

Overview
ided into two areas:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the Button in the vehicle
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left
of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located
within the central area. A warning is issued about
pedestrians who are located within the extended
area only if they are moving in the direction of the
central area.
Safety information Intelligent Safety button
WARNING
165
CONTROLS Safety
Camera Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way is
imminent, a warning symbol appears on the in‐
strument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a signal
sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an

The camera is installed near the interior mirror. evasive maneuver.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear. Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to react. During
a warning, the maximum braking force is used.
Switching on/off Prerequisite for the brake booster is sufficiently
quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal. If
Switching on automatically there is a risk of collision, the system may assist
The system is automatically active after every with braking. When the vehicle is traveling at a
driving off. low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete
stop.
Switching on/off manually The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
Press button briefly: stability has not been restricted, for instance by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
system is displayed. The systems The driver may cancel the braking intervention
are individually switched off accord‐ by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
ing to their respective settings. tively moving the steering wheel.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
to their individual settings. limitations of the detection range and functional
restrictions.
System limits
Press button again:
Safety information
switched on.
▷ The LED lights up green. WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐
Hold down button: rectly, or without justification due to the system
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
switched off. damage to property. Follow the information re‐
▷ The LED goes out. garding the system limits and actively intervene
if needed.
166
Safety CONTROLS
Detection range General information

The detection potential of the camera is limited. Depending on the country version, the system
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐ issues a warning at speeds between
sued late. 35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h.
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐ When switching on the system below this speed,
tected: a message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
▷ Partially covered pedestrians. Warnings are issued by means of a steering
wheel vibration. The time of the warning may
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such be‐
vary depending on the current driving situation.
cause of the viewing angle or contour.
The system does not provide a warning if the
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Safety information
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may WARNING
not be available in the following situations: The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. driver’s personal judgment in assessing road
and traffic safety. There is a risk of an accident.
▷ In tight curves. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐ traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
activated, for instance DSC OFF. propriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in re‐
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐ sponse to a warning.
shield are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button. WARNING
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
after vehicle delivery. stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system might not output warn‐
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
ings or reactions or these might be output late,
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside. conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
Lane departure warning

Concept
The lane departure warning alerts when the vehi‐
cle on roads with lane markings is about to leave
the lane.
167
CONTROLS Safety
Overview are individually switched off accord‐

Button in the vehicle ▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respective
to their individual settings.
Press button again:

switched on.
Intelligent Safety button Hold down button:

switched off.
Camera ▷ The LED goes out.

▷ Yellow symbol: system is activated.
▷ Green symbol: at least one lane mark‐
ing was detected and warnings can
be issued.
Issued warning
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror If you leave the lane
clean and clear.
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel vibrates.
Switching on/off If the turn signal is switched on before changing
the lane, a warning is not issued.
Switching on automatically
The lane departure warning is automatically acti‐ End of warning
vated after departure, if the function was The warning is canceled in the following situa‐
switched on the last time the engine was stop‐ tions:
ped. ▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
Switching on/off manually
▷ When braking hard.
Press button briefly:
▷ When using the turn signal.
system is displayed. The systems
168
Safety CONTROLS
System limits General information
Safety information
WARNING
rectly, or without justification due to the system
damage to property. Follow the information re‐
garding the system limits and actively intervene
if needed. ▷ During normal brake application, the outer
brake lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
Functional limitations brake lights additionally light up.
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. Alertness assistant
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
Concept
such as in construction areas.
The system can detect decreasing alertness or
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice,
fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous
dirt or water.
trips, for instance on highways. In this situation, it
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. is recommended that the driver takes a break.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by ob‐
jects. Safety information
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you. WARNING
▷ When driving toward bright lights. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior driver’s personal judgment in assessing one's
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or
stickers, etc. fatigue may not be detected or not be detected
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately in time. There is a risk of an accident. Make
after vehicle delivery. sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions.
Brake force display

Function
The system is switched on each time the engine
Concept
is started and cannot be switched off.
Additional brake lights indicate emergency brak‐
After travel has begun, the system monitors cer‐
ing to the traffic behind. This can reduce the risk
tain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that de‐
of a rear-end collision.
creasing alertness or fatigue can be detected.
169
CONTROLS Safety
This procedure takes the following criteria into vention by the driver in certain situations. This
account: can reduce the risk of a further collision and the
▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering consequences thereof.
behavior.
▷ Driving conditions, for instance length of trip. Harder vehicle braking
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the It can be necessary to bring the vehicle in certain
system is active and can display a recommenda‐ situations to a halt quicker.
tion to take a break. To do this, for a short time the braking pressure
applied when stepping on the brake pedal must
Break recommendation be higher than the braking pressure achieved by
the automatic braking function. This interrupts
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
automatic braking.
message is displayed in the Control Display with
the recommendation to take a break.
Interrupting automatic braking
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
only once during an uninterrupted trip. It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐
ing in certain situations, for example for an eva‐
After a break, another recommendation to take a sive maneuver.
break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes. Interrupt automatic braking:
▷ By pressing the brake pedal.
System limits ▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
The function may be limited in the following sit‐
uations, for instance and will either output an in‐ At standstill
correct warning or no warning at all: After coming to a halt, the brake is released auto‐
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly. matically.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a
break during longer trips on highways.
PostCrash – iBrake
Concept
In the event of an accident, the system can bring
the vehicle to a halt automatically without inter‐
170
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and Automatic Differential
options Brake
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ The system controls the driving force by auto‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. matic braking intervention on individual wheels.
It also describes features that are not necessarily The function corresponds to a differential lock:
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected the system detects if a wheel begins to spin, be‐
options or country versions. This also applies to cause of loose road surface, for instance and au‐
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ tomatically brakes it.
ing these functions and systems, the applicable The driving force is diverted to the wheel with
laws and regulations must be observed. better traction.
As a result, the engine force is transferred more
Anti-lock Braking System efficiently to the wheels during accelerations.
ABS
DSC Dynamic Stability
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐
ing.
Control
The vehicle maintains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing ac‐ Concept
tive safety. Within the physical limits, the system helps to
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing
gine. engine speed and by applying brakes to the indi‐
vidual wheels.
Brake assistant General information

DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system ditions, for instance:
automatically boosts the vehicle braking capabil‐ ▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
ity to the furthest possible extent. It reduces the
braking distance to a minimum during emer‐ ▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
gency stop. This system utilizes all of the capa‐ can lead to understeering.
bilities provided by the Antilock Brake System Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
ABS. page 173, is a version of the DSC where forward
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal momentum is optimized.
for the duration of the emergency stop.
171
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Safety information The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
tioned.
WARNING
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ General information
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust duced during acceleration and when driving in
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic curves.
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
ate. as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
WARNING
Press and hold this button but not lon‐
When driving with a roof load, for instance with ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐ indicator light for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk strument cluster and displays DSC OFF.
of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐
DSC is switched off.
tions. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC
Dynamic Stability Control when driving with Activating DSC
roof load.
Press button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
Overview light go out.
Button in the vehicle Indicator/warning lights

When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
Automatic activation
When DSC is deactivated, automatic activation
occurs in the following situations:
DSC OFF button ▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
▷ When activating cruise control in TRACTION
or DSC OFF mode.
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
the drive and braking forces.
172
DTC Dynamic Traction Performance Control

Control Performance Control enhances the agility of the
vehicle.
Concept To increase maneuverability, wheels are braked
DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability individually when a sporty driving style is used.
Control where forward momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum headway on spe‐
cial road conditions or loose road surfaces, for in‐ xDrive
stance unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐
what limited driving stability. xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your vehi‐
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐ cle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC Dy‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during namic Stability Control further optimizes traction
acceleration and when driving in curves. and driving dynamics. The xDrive all-wheel-drive
system variably distributes the drive forces to the
Drive carefully. front and rear axles as demanded by the driving
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC un‐ situation and road surface.
der the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-
covered roads. HDC Hill Descent Control
▷ When driving off from deep snow or loose
ground. Concept
▷ When driving with snow chains. Hill Descent Control, HDC, is a downhill control
feature that controls the vehicle speed on steep
Deactivating/activating DTC downhill grades, for instance when driving on un‐
paved roads.
Dynamic Traction Control
When the system is active, the vehicle moves at
Activating DTC the speed set by the driver, without the driver
having to depress the brake pedal.
Press button.
While HTC is controlling the speed, the system
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐ automatically distributes the braking force to the
ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF individual wheels. This improves vehicle drivabil‐
lights up. ity and stability. If necessary, the Antilock Brake
System prevents the wheels from locking.
Deactivating DTC
Press button again.
General information
Hill Descent Control can be activated at speeds
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
below approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
light go out.
Speeds can be set between approx.
2 mph/3 km/h and approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
When the vehicle is moving downhill, the system
reduces the speed to the set value, within the
physical limits.
173
Only use HDC in low gears or in selector lever Increasing or decreasing vehicle
position D or R. speed
Overview Using the cruise control rocker
switch
The desired speed can be changed using the
cruise control rocker switch on the steering
wheel.
HDC
▷ Press the rocker switch up: the speed in‐

Activating HDC creases gradually.
Press button. The LED above the button ▷ Press the rocker switch up and hold: the
lights up. speed increases while the rocker switch is
Speeds between approx. 2 mph/3 km/h and ap‐ pressed.
prox. 20 mph/30 km/h are adopted as the de‐ ▷ Press the rocker switch down: the speed re‐
sired speed. duces gradually.
▷ Press the rocker switch down and hold: the
Display in the instrument cluster speed reduces while the rocker switch is
pressed.
A symbol and the selected de‐
sired speed are displayed.
Using the brake pedal
▷ Green display: HDC is active,
the system is reducing the ve‐ While HDC is controlling the speed, the set de‐
hicle speed. sired speed can be reduced by depressing the
brake pedal.
▷ Orange display: HDC is on standby.
Deactivating HDC
Display in the Head-up Display
Press button again. The LED goes out.
The HDC status can also be displayed in the
HDC is automatically deactivated above
Head-up Display.
approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Malfunction
If a malfunction occurs, a message is displayed in
174
Servotronic Operating the programs
Button Program
Concept
Servotronic is a speed-dependent power steer‐ SPORT
ing function. COMFORT
The system provides the steering force with ECO PRO
more support at low speeds than at higher ones.
This makes it easier to park, for instance, and
makes steering more direct when driving at
faster speeds. SPORT
Furthermore, the steering force adapts according
Concept
to the driving program, so that a direct, sporty
feel or a comfortable steering response is con‐ Consistently sporty tuning of the steering and
veyed. drivetrain for greater driving agility.
With the appropriate equipment, the tuning of
the suspension also changes and SPORT can be
Driving Dynamics Control individually configured.
The configuration is stored for the profile cur‐
Concept rently used.
The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine-tune
the vehicle's settings and features. Various pro‐ Activating SPORT
grams can be selected for this purpose. Press button repeatedly until SPORT is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Overview
Configuring SPORT
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure SPORT"
rently used.
This configuration is retrieved when the SPORT
driving mode is activated.
COMFORT
Concept
For balanced tuning.
175
Activating COMFORT Selected program

Press button repeatedly until COM‐ The instrument cluster displays
FORT is displayed in the instrument the selected program.
cluster.
ECO PRO
Concept Drive-off assistant

ECO PRO, refer to page 232, provides consis‐
tent tuning to maximize range.
Concept
This system supports driving off on uphill grades.
Activating ECO PRO
The parking brake is not required.
Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO
is displayed in the instrument cluster. Driving off with the drive-off
assistant
Configuring ECO PRO 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
Via iDrive: 2. Release the foot brake and drive off without
1. "My Vehicle" delay.
2. "Vehicle settings" After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is

held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer is
4. "Configure ECO PRO"
used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
rently used.
Displays
Program selection
Pressing the button displays a list
of the selectable programs. De‐
pending on your vehicle's optional
features, the list in the instrument
cluster can differ from the illustra‐
tion shown.
176
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and General information
options A camera on the interior mirror is used to detect
vehicles driving ahead.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Depending on the driving settings, the features
cific and optional features offered with the series. of the cruise control can change in certain areas.
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected Safety information
WARNING
laws and regulations must be observed. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
Camera-based cruise tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
control with Stop&Go driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
function, ACC closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐
WARNING
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using
the buttons on the steering wheel. An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
The system maintains the desired speed on
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle acceler‐
ing.
ates or brakes automatically.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The ▷ Set the parking brake.
speed is adjusted as far as the given situation al‐ ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
lows. turn the front wheels in the direction of the
The distance can be adjusted in several steps. curb.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respective ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
speed. also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and wheel chock.
then proceeds to drive again within a brief period,
the system is able to detect this within the given
system limits.
177
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Button Function
WARNING
Increase distance, refer to page 180.
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic Rocker switch.
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ Set speed, refer to page 179.
Camera
A camera in the area of the interior mirror serves
WARNING
to detect vehicles.
Risk of accident due to too high speed differen‐
ces to other vehicles, for instance in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving
vehicle.
▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
where appropriate. Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Speed range
Button Function The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
Cruise control on/off, refer to
The desired speed can be set between
page 178.
20 mph/30 km/h and 85 mph/140 km/h.
Store/maintain speed, refer to The system can also be activated when station‐
page 179. ary.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 178. Switching on/off and interrupting
Continue cruise control with the last cruise control
setting, refer to page 180.
Switching on
Reduce distance, refer to page 180.
Press button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light

up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
178
Cruise control is active and maintains the set Setting the speed
speed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if Maintaining/storing the speed
necessary.
Switching off
To switch off the system while standing, step on
brake pedal at the same time.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is

deleted.
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
Interrupting manually the system is interrupted.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
If interrupting the system while stationary, press
on the brake pedal at the same time. The stored speed is displayed in the speedome‐
ter and briefly in the instrument cluster, refer to
Interrupting automatically page 181.
The system is automatically interrupted in the DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
following situations: necessary.
▷ When the driver applies the brakes. The speed can also be stored by press‐
▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged. ing a button.
▷ When Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ Press button.
vated.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes. Changing the speed
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's
door is opened while the vehicle is standing
still.
▷ If the detection range of the camera is im‐
paired, for instance by soiling, heavy precipi‐
tation or glare effects from the sun.
▷ After a stationary period of approx. 3 seconds
when the vehicle has been braked to a stop
by the system.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the

vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road
is clear.
179
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the Continuing cruise control
point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
creases or decreases by approx. General information
1 mph/1 km/h.
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past by calling up the stored speed.
the resistance point, the desired speed
Make sure that the difference between current
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
speed and stored speed is not too large before
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐
action. tional braking or accelerating may occur.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
Adjusting distance deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
Safety information
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
WARNING Calling up stored speed and

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the distance
driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system
limits, braking can be late. There is a risk of ac‐ Press button with the system inter‐
cidents or risk of damage to property. Be aware rupted. Cruise control is continued with
to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the the stored values. The selected speed is briefly
distance to the traffic and weather conditions displayed in the Info Display.
and maintain the prescribed safety distance,
possibly by braking. Switching distance control on/off
Safety information
Without Traffic Jam Assist: reducing
distance
WARNING
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set. The system does not react to traffic driving
ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored
The instrument cluster displays the set speed. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
distance. damage to property. Adjust the desired speed
to the traffic conditions and brake as needed.
Without Traffic Jam Assist:

increasing distance Switching distance control off
Press button repeatedly until the de‐ Distance control can be switched off and on
sired distance is set. when driving with cruise control activated.
Press and hold this button, or
The instrument cluster displays the set
distance.
Press and hold this button.
180
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ Distance display

ter lights up.
Distance 3
To switch distance control back on, press button
again briefly.
After changing over distance control, a Check Distance 4
Control message is displayed. This value is set automatically after the
system is switched on.
Displays in the instrument
cluster Detected vehicle
Symbol lights up orange:
Desired speed and stored speed
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
▷ Marking lights up green: sys‐ you.
tem is active, the marking indi‐
cates the desired speed. Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has
▷ Marking lights up orange: sys‐ driven away.
tem is interrupted, the marking
indicates the stored speed. ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, activate
ACC by briefly stepping on the accelerator pedal
▷ The marking does not light up: the system is
or pressing the RES CNCL button or the rocker
switched off.
switch.
Brief status display Indicator/warning lights

Selected desired speed. Symbol flashes orange:
The conditions are not adequate for the
system to work.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐ The system was deactivated but applies the
rently fulfilled. brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Symbol flashes red and a signal sounds:
Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you is
You are prompted to intervene by brak‐
shown.
ing or making an evasive maneuver.
Distance display
The system has been interrupted or dis‐
Distance 1 tance control is temporarily suppressed
because the accelerator pedal is being
pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
Distance 2
Distance control is temporarily sup‐
pressed because the accelerator pedal is
being pressed; a vehicle was detected.
181
Displays in the Head-up Display Swerving vehicles

Some system information can also be displayed
in the Head-up Display.
System limits
Detection range
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected

until it is completely within the same lane as your
vehicle.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
The detection capacity of the system and the tance. It may not be possible to restore the se‐
automatic braking capacity are limited. lected distance in certain situations, including if
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly
detected. approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system re‐
Deceleration quests that the driver intervene by braking and
carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.
The system does not decelerate in the following
situations:
▷ For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly slow- Cornering
moving road users.
▷ For red traffic lights.
▷ For cross traffic.
▷ For oncoming traffic.
▷ Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonworking
lighting at night.
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the

speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
into a curve at an appropriate speed.
The system has a limited detection range. Situa‐
tions can arise in tight curves where a vehicle
driving ahead will not be detected or will be de‐
tected very late.
182
Engine power
The desired speed may not be maintained on
uphill grades if engine power is insufficient.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐
tem fails or was automatically deactivated.
When you approach a curve the system may lowing situations:
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the ▷ When an object was not correctly detected.
bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snowfall.
may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After
releasing the accelerator pedal the system is re‐ ▷ In tight curves.
activated and controls speed independently. ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield are dirty or covered.
Driving away ▷ When driving toward bright lights.
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off ▷ Up to 20 seconds after the start of the en‐
automatically; for example: gine, via the Start/Stop button.
▷ On steep uphill grades. ▷ During calibration of the camera immediately

after vehicle delivery.
▷ From bumps in the road.
In these cases, press on the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐ Concept
orable weather or light conditions:
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
▷ Poorer vehicle recognition. justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are The system maintains the desired speed. The
already recognized. system accelerates and brakes automatically as
needed.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐
tions:
▷ Wet conditions.
General information
Depending on the driving settings, the features
▷ Snowfall.
of the cruise control can change in certain areas.
▷ Slush.
▷ Fog. Safety information
▷ Glare.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic WARNING
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐
stance by braking, steering or evading.
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
183
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust Button Function

driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Pause cruise control, refer to
ate. page 184.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting, refer to page 185.
WARNING Rocker switch:
The use of the system can lead to an increased Set speed, refer to page 185.
risk of accidents in the following situations,
for instance:
▷ On winding roads.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet Switching on
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to
property. Only use the system if driving at con‐
stant speed is possible. The marking in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
Cruise control is active and maintains the set
speed.
WARNING
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
necessary.
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐ Switching off
tervene where appropriate. Press button on the steering wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is

Overview deleted.
Buttons on the steering wheel Interrupting manually

Button Function When active, press the button on the
steering wheel.
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 184.
Interrupting automatically
Store speed, refer to page 185.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few sec‐
onds or released while a gear is not engaged.
▷ If the gear engaged is too high for the current
speed.
184
▷ If selector lever position N is set. Changing the speed

▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly

until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the

vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road
is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
Press the rocker switch up or down once while creases or decreases by approx.
the system is interrupted. 1 mph/1 km/h.
When the system is switched on, the current ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
speed is maintained and stored as the desired the point of resistance, the desired speed in‐
speed. creases or decreases by a maximum of
5 mph/10 km/h.
The stored speed is displayed in the speedome‐
ter and in the instrument cluster, refer to ▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
page 186. point and holding it accelerates or deceler‐
ates the vehicle without requiring pressure on
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
the accelerator pedal.
necessary.
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
ton.
switch beyond the resistance point causes
Press button. the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐
tional braking or accelerating may occur.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
185
▷ When the system is switched off. System limits

▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Engine power
Calling up stored speed The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
Press button on the steering wheel. but may not be maintained on uphill grades if en‐
gine power is insufficient.
The stored speed is reached again and main‐
tained.
PDC Park Distance Control
Displays in the instrument
cluster Concept
PDC is a support when parking. The system de‐
Indicator light tects objects behind the vehicle. If the vehicle is
equipped with front PDC, objects in front of the
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐ vehicle are detected too. Objects that you are
ped, the indicator light in the instrument approaching slowly are indicated by signal tones
cluster indicates whether the system is and a display on the Control Display.
switched on.
General information
Desired speed and stored speed The ultrasound sensors for measuring the dis‐
▷ Marking lights up green: sys‐ tances are located in the bumpers.
tem is active, the marking indi‐ The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
cates the desired speed. stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
▷ Marking lights up orange: sys‐ 6 ft/2 m.
tem is interrupted, the marking An acoustic warning is first given in the following
indicates the stored speed. situations:
▷ The marking does not light up: the system is ▷ By the front sensors and the two rear corner
switched off. sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the ob‐
ject.
Status display ▷ By the rear middle sensors at a distance to
the object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
Selected desired speed.
▷ When a collision is imminent.
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the Safety information

conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
rently fulfilled.
WARNING
Displays in the Head-up Display
Some system information can also be displayed traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
in the Head-up Display. tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
186
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Switching on/off

ate.
Switching on automatically
The system switches on automatically in the fol‐
WARNING lowing situations:
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance ▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when
Control is activated, the warning can be de‐ the engine is running.
layed due to physical circumstances. There is a
The rearview camera also switches on.
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid ▷ If equipped with front PDC: when obstacles
driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control are detected behind or in front of the vehicle
is not yet active. by PDC and the speed is slower than approx.
2.5 mph/4 km/h.
You may switch automatic activation on and off
Overview when obstacles are detected. Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
With front PDC: button in vehicle
3. "Parking"
4. "Automatic PDC activation": depending on
the vehicle equipment.
5. "Automatic PDC activation"
rently used.
If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activation
on obstacle detection, for instance in vehicle
Park assistance button washes, to reduce false alarms.
Automatic deactivation during

Ultrasound sensors forward travel
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC, The system switches off when a certain driving
for instance in the bumpers. distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
With front PDC: switching on/off

manually
Press park assistance button.
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐
ers, bicycle racks.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
187
The rearview camera image is displayed if the re‐ Visual warning

verse gear is engaged when pressing the park
assistance button.
WARNING
Signal tones
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle
is approaching an object. E.g., if an object is de‐
tected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone
sounds from the left rear speaker. The approach of the vehicle to an object is
The shorter the distance to the object, the shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
shorter the intervals. farther away are already displayed on the Control
If the distance to a detected object is less than Display before a signal sounds.
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is
A display appears as soon as Park Distance Con‐
sounded.
trol (PDC) is activated.
With front PDC: if objects are simultaneously lo‐
The range of the sensors is represented in the
cated both in front of and behind the vehicle, an
colors green, yellow and red.
alternating continuous signal is sounded.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
The signal tone is switched off, when selector
played, the switch can be made to PDC:
lever position P is engaged on vehicles with
Steptronic transmission. 1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. "Rear view camera"
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the System limits
entertainment volume can be adjusted.
Via iDrive: Safety information
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "iDrive settings" WARNING
3. "Tone" The system can react not at all, too late, incor‐
4. "Volume settings"
5. "PDC" damage to property. Follow the information re‐
6. Set the desired value. garding the system limits and actively intervene
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ if needed.
rently used.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
188
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance ▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
coats. ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for instance
▷ With external interference of the ultrasound, sweeping machines, high pressure steam
for instance from passing vehicles or loud cleaners or neon lights.
machines. The malfunction is signaled by a continuous tone
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged alternating between the front and rear speakers.
or out of position. As soon as the malfunction due to other ultra‐
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as sound sources is no longer present, the system
high relative humidity, wet conditions, snow‐ is again fully functional.
fall, extreme heat, or strong wind. If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activation
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other on obstacle detection, for instance in vehicle
vehicles. washes, to reduce false alarms.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects. Malfunction
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as A Check Control message is displayed.
ledges or cargo. The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. area on the Control Display.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a
such as fences. dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance Rearview camera
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone Concept
sounds.
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
False warnings behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐ play.
lowing conditions even though there is no obsta‐
cle within the detection range: Safety information
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with WARNING
ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow. driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
▷ On rough road surfaces. traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
tively intervene where appropriate.
smooth walls, for instance in underground ga‐
rages.
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
189
Overview Switch the system back on, if needed.
Depending on the vehicle Depending on the vehicle

equipment: button in the vehicle equipment: switching on/off
manually

The parking assistance functions are shown on
the Control Display.
Switching the view via iDrive

Park assistance button
If the rearview camera view is not displayed,
change the view via iDrive:
Camera 1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.

2. "Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
The camera lens is located in the handle of the ▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
tailgate. clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems and
trailers that are not connected to a trailer
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
power socket can lead to malfunctions.
necessary, clean the camera lens.
Activating assistance functions

Switching on/off More than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.
Switching on automatically Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
The system is switched on automatically if selec‐
▷ Parking aid lines
tor lever position R is engaged when the engine
is running. "Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
Automatic deactivation during ▷ Obstacle marking
forward travel "Obstacle marking"
The system switches off when a certain driving Obstacles are marked, depending on the ve‐
distance or speed is exceeded. hicle equipment.
190
Pathway lines Obstacle marking
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐ Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacle
age of the rearview camera. markings can be faded into the image of the
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐ rearview camera.
quired when parking and maneuvering on level The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings
roads. match the markings of the PDC Park Distance
Pathway lines depend on the current steering Control.
angle and are continuously adjusted to the steer‐
ing wheel movements. Parking using pathway and
turning radius lines
Turning radius lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning radius
lines lead to within the limits of the parking
space.
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed

on the rearview camera image together with
pathway lines. 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
Turning radius lines show the course of the the pathway line covers the corresponding
smallest possible turning radius on a level road. turning radius line.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after the
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.
191
Display settings Parking assistant

Brightness
Concept
With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
reached, and press the Controller.
Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed. This system assists the driver in parking parallel
2. Select the symbol. to the road.
reached, and press the Controller. General information
Parking assistant handling is divided into three
System limits steps:
▷ Switching on and activating.
Detection of objects ▷ Parking space search.
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding ▷ Parking.
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system. System status and instructions on required ac‐
tions are displayed on the Control Display.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some as‐
sistance functions also consider data from the Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on
PDC Park Distance Control. both sides of the vehicle.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐ The parking assistant calculates the best possi‐
trol chapter. ble parking line and takes control of steering dur‐
ing the parking procedure.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate The parking assistant uses the sensors of PDC
the distance from the objects on the display. Park Distance Control. Also follow the safety in‐
formation for PDC Park Distance Control.
Safety information
WARNING
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
192
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ Functional requirements

ate.
Ultrasound sensors
Ensure full functionality:
NOTICE
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐
The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over ers.
or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
property. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
For measuring parking spaces
Also follow the safety information for PDC Park ▷ Maximum speed while driving forward approx.
Distance Control. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles:
Overview 5 ft/1.5 m.
Button in the vehicle Suitable parking space

▷ Gaps behind an object that has a min. length
of 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: your
vehicle's length plus approx. 3.3 ft/1.0 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
For parking
Park assistance button ▷ Doors and tailgate closed.
▷ Parking brake released.
Ultrasound sensors ▷ When parking in parking spaces on the driv‐
er's side, the corresponding turn signal must
be switched on.
Switching on and activating
Switching on with the button

The LED lights up.
The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking The current status of the parking space search is
spaces are located on the side of the vehicle. indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
193
Switching on with reverse gear straight, even if the system is deactivated.

Shift into reverse. When the system is deactivated, the displays
on the Control Display are shown in gray.
The current status of the parking space search is
indicated on the Control Display.
Parking using the parking
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
assistant
Display on the Control Display 1. Press the park assistance button or
shift into reverse gear to switch on the park‐
System activated/deactivated ing assistant, refer to page 193. Activate the
parking assistant, if needed.
Symbol Meaning
Parking assistant is activated.
Gray: the system is not available. 2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed of
White: the system is available but not up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a dis‐
activated. tance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search and
The system is activated.
possible parking spaces are displayed, refer
to page 194, on the Control Display.
Parking space search and system
3. Follow the instructions on the display.
status
The best possible parking position will come
after gear change on the stationary vehicle -
wait for the automatic steering wheel move.
The end of the parking procedure is indicated
on the display.
4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
Interrupting manually
▷ Symbol P on the vehicle image: the parking The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
assistant is activated and the parking space time:
search is active. ▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol on
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking the Control Display.
spaces at the edge of the road next to the ve‐ ▷ Press park assistance button.
hicle symbol. When the parking assistant is
active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
lighted. Interrupting automatically
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐ The system is interrupted automatically in the
tive. Steering control has been following situations:
taken over by system. ▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or
takes over steering.
▷ If a gear is selected that does not match the
▷ Parking space search is always active when‐ instruction on the display.
ever the vehicle is moving forward slow and
194
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. Functional limitations

6 mph/10 km/h. The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road lowing situations:
surfaces. ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts or roads.
the time taken for parking is exceeded. ▷ On slippery ground.
▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
clearances that are too small.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
▷ When switching to another function on the parking space.
Control Display.
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
of a port.
Resuming
An interrupted parking procedure can be contin‐ Limits of ultrasonic measurement
ued, if needed.
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to the following situations:
page 193, and follow the instructions on the dis‐
play. ▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance
Switching off coats.
The system can be switched off as follows: ▷ With external interference of the ultrasound,
for instance from passing vehicles or loud
▷ Press park assistance button.
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
▷ Switching off the ignition.
or out of position.
System limits ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as

high relative humidity, wet conditions, snow‐
fall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
Safety information
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
WARNING
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
limits. There is a risk of accidents or risk of ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
damage to property. Follow the information re‐ ledges or cargo.
garding the system limits and actively intervene ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
if needed. ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
No parking assistance ▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
The parking assistant does not offer assistance ▷ If cargo protrudes.
in the following situations: ▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
▷ In tight curves. curbs, can move into the blind area of the
195
sensors before or after a continuous tone

sounds.
Parking spaces that are not suitable may be de‐
tected or suitable parking spaces may not be de‐
tected at all.
Tire size
The parking position may vary depending on the
tire size.
Malfunction
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked by a dealer’s service center or another
196
Climate control CONTROLS
Climate control
Vehicle features and Interior air quality
options The air quality inside the vehicle is improved by
an emissions-tested interior, a microfilter, and a
climate-control system for regulating tempera‐
ture, air flow, and recirculated-air mode.
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected In addition there are other functions which de‐
options or country versions. This also applies to pend on the vehicle's equipment, for instance
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ microfilter/activated-charcoal filter, automatic cli‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable mate control with automatic recirculated-air con‐
laws and regulations must be observed. trol AUC, and parked-car ventilation.
Air conditioner
1 Air distribution settings 5 Recirculated-air mode

2 Air conditioning 6 Temperature
3 Air flow 7 Seat heating, right 93
4 Air flow display 8 Rear window defroster
197
CONTROLS Climate control
9 Seat heating, left 93
Climate control functions in Switching on/off

detail Press button.
The LED is illuminated with air condi‐
Switching the system on/off tioning switched on.
Switching on Depending on the weather, the windshield and

Press any button except for the following: side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
gine is started.
▷ Rear window defroster.
The air conditioner produces condensation wa‐
▷ Seat heating.
ter, refer to page 227, that will exit from below
the vehicle.
Switching off
Press and hold the left button until the Recirculated-air mode
control switches off.
Concept
Temperature You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants
in the immediate environment by temporarily
Concept suspending the supply of outside air. The system
then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.
The system heats or cools, depending on the set
temperature.
Operation
Settings Press button repeatedly to select an op‐
erating mode:
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature. ▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of
outside air into the vehicle is permanently
blocked.
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate
mode switches off automatically after a certain
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the
amount of time, depending on the environmental
set temperature.
conditions.
Air conditioning With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and the fog‐
Concept ging of the windows increases.
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐ If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated-
humidified and, depending on the temperature air mode and increase the air flow, if needed.
setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the en‐
gine running.
198
Controlling the air flow manually ▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted Defrosting windows and removing
manually. condensation
Make the following settings to defrost the win‐
Operation dows and remove condensation:
Press the left or right side of the button: ▷ Direct the air distribution onto the windows.
decrease or increase air flow. ▷ Increasing the air flow.
The intensity is indicated by LEDs. The highest ▷ Increase the temperature.
level is active when seven LEDs are lit.
▷ Switch on the air conditioning if needed.
The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐
duced automatically to save battery power. Rear window defroster
Press button. The LED lights up.
Controlling the air distribution The rear window defroster switches off
manually automatically after a certain period of time.
Concept For permanent activation, press the button for

longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate, press the
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐ button again.
justed manually.
The rear window defroster can only be activated
Operation continuously at an external temperature below
approx. 23 ℉/–5 ℃.
Turn the wheel to select the de‐
sired program or the desired in‐
termediate setting. Microfilter
In external and recirculated-air mode the microfil‐
ter filters dust and pollen from the air.
▷ Windows. Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
▷ Upper body region. nance, refer to page 271.
▷ Floor area.
199
Automatic climate control
1 Defrosting windows and removing condensa‐ 10 Air conditioning

tion 11 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
2 Temperature, left lated-air mode
3 AUTO program 12 Seat heating, right 93
4 Switching off the system 13 Air distribution settings
5 Air flow, AUTO intensity 14 Seat heating, left 93
6 Display 15 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
7 SYNC program clear
8 Maximum cooling 16 Rear window defroster
9 Temperature, right
Climate control functions in ▷ Seat heating.

detail
Switching off
Switching the system on/off Press button.
Switching on
Press any button except for the following:
▷ SYNC program.
▷ Rear window defroster.
200
Temperature The air conditioning is switched on automatically

with the AUTO program.
Concept When using the automatic climate control, con‐
The automatic climate control achieves the set densation water, refer to page 227, develops
temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary and drains underneath the vehicle. This is nor‐
by using the maximum cooling or heating power, mal.
and then keeps it constant.
Maximum cooling
Settings
Concept
Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature. The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐
timum air flow and recirculated-air mode.
General information
The selected temperature is shown on the dis‐ The function is available above an external tem‐
play of the automatic climate control. perature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ And with the en‐
gine running.
The automatic climate control reaches this tem‐
perature as quickly as possible, if needed, by in‐
Switching on/off
creasing the cooling or heating output, and then
keeps it constant. Press button.
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐ The LED is illuminated with the system
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate switched on.
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature. Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
Air conditioning The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow ac‐
tive.
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐ AUTO program
humidified and, depending on the temperature
setting, warmed again. Concept
The car's interior can only be cooled with the en‐ Air flow, air distribution and temperature are con‐
gine running. trolled automatically.
Switching on/off Switching on/off
Press button. Press button.

The LED is illuminated with air condi‐ The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
tioning switched on. program switched on.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and Depending on the selected temperature, the in‐
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐ tensity of the AUTO program, and outside influ‐
gine is started. ences, the air is directed to the windshield, side
windows, upper body, and into the floor area.
201
The air conditioning, refer to page 201, is ▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the sup‐
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ ply of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
gram. nently blocked.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ Recirculated-air mode switches off automatically
trols the program so as to prevent window con‐ at low external temperatures after a certain
densation as much as possible. amount of time in order to avoid window fogging.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the re‐
Intensity circulated-air mode and press the AUTO button
With the AUTO program switched on, the inten‐ to utilize the condensation sensor. Make sure
sity can be set. This changes the automatic con‐ that air can flow to the windshield.
trol for the air flow and air distribution.
Press the left or right side of the button: Controlling the air flow manually
decrease or increase intensity.
Concept
The selected intensity is shown on the display of The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
the automatic climate control. manually.
Automatic recirculated-air control/ General information

recirculated-air mode To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
Concept
The automatic recirculated-air control AUC rec‐ Operation
ognizes odors or pollutants in the outside air.
Press the left or right side of the button:
The outside air supply is shut off and the interior
decrease or increase air flow.
air is recirculated.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
General information the automatic climate control.
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollu‐ The air flow of the automatic climate control may
tants in the outside air and controls the shut-off be reduced automatically to save battery power.
automatically.
If the system is deactivated, outside air continu‐ Controlling the air distribution
ously flows into the car's interior. manually
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and the fog‐ Concept
ging of the windows increases. The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐
justed manually.
Switching on/off
Press button repeatedly to select an op‐ Operation
erating mode: Press button repeatedly to select a pro‐
gram:
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air con‐ ▷ Upper body region and floor area.
trol: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside ▷ Floor area.
air and shuts off automatically.
202
▷ Windows and floor area. If the windows are fogged over, you can also
▷ Windows. switch on the air conditioning or press the AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor.
▷ Windows and upper body region.
▷ Upper body region. Rear window defroster
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area.
Press button. The LED lights up.
If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO
The rear window defroster switches off
button to utilize the condensation sensor.
automatically after a certain period of time.
SYNC program For permanent activation, press the button for

longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate, press the
Concept button again.
The system enables the transfer of current set‐ The rear window defroster can only be activated
tings on the driver's side for temperature, air continuously at an external temperature below
flow, air distribution, and the AUTO program to approx. 23 ℉/–5 ℃.
the front passenger side and to the left and right
rear. Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated-air mode the microfil‐
Switching on/off
ter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and
Press button. gaseous pollutants out of the air.
The current setting of the temperature Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
on the driver's side is transferred to the front nance, refer to page 271.
passenger side.
The program is switched off if the setting on the
front passenger side is changed. Ventilation
Defrosting windows and removing Front ventilation

condensation
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed from
the windshield and the front side windows.
Switching on/off
Press button.
The LED is illuminated with the system ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
switched on. row 1.
For this purpose, point the side vents towards ▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
the side windows as needed. vents continuously, arrows 2.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow ac‐
tive.
203
Settings ▷ Direct operation or preset activation time:

▷ Ventilation for cooling: does not depend on external temperature.
Direct vent in your direction when car's inte‐ ▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
rior is too hot. If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the
▷ Draft-free ventilation: vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus, limit
the maximum activation time to save the ve‐
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you. hicle battery. The system will be available
again after the engine is started or after a
Ventilation in the rear short trip.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly

Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
row 1.
4. "Activate comfort ventilation now"
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
of the vents, arrow 2. The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting the activation time

Parked-car ventilation
Via iDrive:
Concept 1. "My Vehicle"

The parked-car ventilation ventilates the car's in‐ 2. "Vehicle settings"
terior and lowers its temperature, if needed. 3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Comfort ventilation"
General information 5. Select the desired activation time.
The parked-car ventilation can be switched on
6. Set the desired time.
and off directly or by using two preset activation
times. The system remains switched on for
30 minutes. Activating the activation time
The parked-car ventilation system is operated via Via iDrive:
iDrive. 1. "My Vehicle"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
▷ Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-ready
4. "For start time at:"
state.
Activate the desired activation time.
204
The symbol on the automatic climate control

lights up when the activation time is activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
flashes when the system has been switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
205
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
options the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
It also describes features that are not necessarily Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packaging
or in the owner's manual of the system to
be controlled, the system is generally
compatible with the integrated Universal Remote
Control.
If you have any questions, please contact:
Integrated Universal ▷ A dealer’s service center or another qualified
Remote Control service center or repair shop.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
Concept HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex

The integrated Universal Remote Control in the Corporation.
interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of
remote-controlled systems, such as garage door Control elements on the interior
drives, barriers, or lighting systems. The mirror
Integrated Universal Remote Control replaces up
to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate
the remote control, the buttons on the interior
mirror must be programmed with the desired
functions. The hand-held transmitter for the par‐
ticular system is required in order to program the
remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored func‐
tions for the sake of security.
Safety information ▷ LED, arrow 1.

▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
WARNING ▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐

quired for programming.
Body parts can be jammed when operating re‐
mote-controlled systems, such as the garage
door, using the integrated Universal Remote
Control. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. Make sure that the area of
206
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Programming Special feature of the rolling code

wireless system
General information If you are unable to operate the system after re‐
1. Switch on the ignition. peated programming, please check if the system
2. Initial setup: to be controlled features a rolling code radio sys‐
tem.
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐ Read the system's owner's manual, or press the
mately 20 seconds until the LED on the inte‐ programmed button on the interior mirror longer.
rior mirror flashes. This erases all program‐ If the LED on the interior mirror starts flashing
ming of the buttons on the interior mirror. rapidly and then stays lit constantly for 2 sec‐
onds, the system features a rolling code radio
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system system. Flashing and continuous illumination of
to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to the LED will repeat for approximately 20 sec‐
8 cm away from the buttons of the interior onds.
mirror. The required distance depends on the
hand-held transmitter. For systems with a rolling code radio system, the
integrated Universal Remote Control and the
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button of system also have to be synchronized.
the desired function on the hand-held trans‐
mitter and the button to be programmed on Please read the owner's manual to find out how
the interior mirror. The LED on the interior to synchronize the system.
mirror will begin flashing slowly. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED person.
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing faster Synchronizing the universal remote control with
indicates that the button on the interior mirror the system:
has been programmed.
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
If the LED does not flash faster after at least controlled system.
60 seconds, change the distance between
2. Program the desired button on the interior
the interior mirror and the hand-held trans‐
mirror as described.
mitter and repeat the step. Several more at‐
tempts at different distances may be neces‐ 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
sary. Wait at least 15 seconds between on the system being programmed. You have
attempts. approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held 4. Hold down the programmed button on the in‐
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐ terior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and then release it. If necessary, repeat this step
release the hand-held transmitter button for up to three times in order to finish synchroni‐
2 seconds. zation. Once synchronization is complete, the
programmed function will be carried out.
6. To program other functions on other buttons,
repeat steps 3 to 5.
Reprogramming individual
The systems can be controlled using the interior
mirror buttons.
buttons
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be
programmed.
207
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts within receiving range of the system until the
flashing slowly, hold the hand-held transmit‐ function is activated. The interior mirror LED
ter for the system to be controlled approx. 1 stays lit while the wireless signal is being trans‐
to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the but‐ mitted.
tons of the interior mirror. The required dis‐
tance depends on the hand-held transmitter. Deleting stored functions
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐
desired function on the hand-held transmit‐ tions cannot be deleted individually. Press and
ter. hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror
5. Release both buttons as soon as the interior simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds un‐
mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The LED til the LED on the interior mirror flashes rapidly.
flashing faster indicates that the button on
the interior mirror has been programmed.
The system can then be controlled by the Digital compass
button on the interior mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at most Overview
60 seconds, change the distance and repeat
the programming starting with step 4. Several
more attempts at different distances may be
necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between
attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and
release the hand-held transmitter button for
2 seconds.
1 Control button
Operation 2 Mirror display
WARNING Mirror display

Body parts can be jammed when operating re‐ The point of the compass is displayed in the mir‐
mote-controlled systems, such as the garage ror when driving straight.
door, using the integrated Universal Remote
Control. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐ Operating concept
age to property. Make sure that the area of Various functions can be called up by pressing
movement of the respective system is clear the control button with a pointed object, such as
during programming and operation. Also follow the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. The
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐ following setting options are displayed in succes‐
mitter. sion, depending on how long the control button
is pressed:
The system, such as the garage door, can be op‐
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
erated using the button on the interior mirror
while the engine is running or when the ignition ▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
is started. To do this, hold down the button ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
208
▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering set‐ Setting the compass zones

ting.
Sets the particular compass zones on the vehicle
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting. so that the compass operates correctly; refer to
World map with compass zones.
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure ▷ The point of the compass displayed does not

1. Press and hold the control button for approx. change despite changing the direction of
3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set com‐ travel.
pass zone appears in the mirror. ▷ Not all points of the compass are displayed.
2. To change the zone setting, press the control
button quickly and repeatedly until the num‐ Procedure
ber of the compass zone that corresponds 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic ob‐
with your location appears in the mirror. jects or overhead power lines near the vehicle
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ and that there is sufficient room to drive
pass is ready for use again after approximately around in a circle.
10 seconds. 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
3. Press and hold the control button for approx.
Calibrating the digital compass 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the
The digital compass must be calibrated in the display. Next, drive in a complete circle at
event of the following: least once at a speed of no more than
4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is successful, the
▷ The wrong compass point is displayed.
"C" is replaced by the points of the compass.
209
Left/right-hand steering Ashtray/cigarette lighter

The digital compass is already set for right or
left-hand steering at the factory.
Ashtray
Setting the language Opening
Press and hold the control button for approx. 12
to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control button
again to switch between English "E" and German
"O".
Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐
mately 10 seconds.
Sun visor
The ashtray can be inserted in the cup holder.
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Emptying
Take out the insert.
Glare shield from the side
Folding out Cigarette lighter

1. Fold the sun visor down.
2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to the WARNING
side. Contact with the hot heating element or the hot
3. Move it back to the desired position. socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns.
Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette
lighter falls down or is held against the respec‐
Folding up
tive objects. There is a risk of fire and injuries.
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun vi‐ Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle.
sor. Make sure that children do not use the ciga‐
rette lighter and burn themselves.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind
a cover. When the cover is opened, the interior NOTE
lighting switches on.
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.
210
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can
work with high voltages and currents, which
means that the 12 volt on-board network can
be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of
damage to property. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
aid terminals in the engine compartment.
The cigarette lighter is located in the center con‐
sole.
NOTE
Push in the cigarette lighter.
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
The cigarette lighter can be re‐
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
moved as soon as it pops back
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
out.
socket cover again after using the socket.
Sockets Front center console
General information
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is running
or when the ignition is switched on.
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors. Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
Safety information
WARNING
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the
airbags, such as portable navigation devices,
can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be
thrown around in the car's interior during un‐
folding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
devices and cables are not in the airbag's area
of unfolding. Remove the cover.
211
Rear center console Overview
Remove the cover. The USB interface is located between the front
seats.
In the cargo area

Connecting an external device
Follow the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐
tor into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB storage device against me‐
chanical damage.
▷ Due to the large number of USB media avail‐
able on the market, it cannot be guaranteed
The socket is located on the right side in the
that every device is operable on the vehicle.
cargo area.
▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐
ronmental conditions, such as very high tem‐
peratures; refer to the owner's manual of the
USB interface device.
▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐
Concept niques, proper playback of the media stored
Mobile devices with USB port can be connected on the USB storage device cannot be guar‐
to the USB interface. anteed in all cases.
▷ A connected USB storage device will be sup‐
General information plied with charging current via the USB inter‐
Follow the information regarding the connection face if the device supports this. At higher
of mobile devices to the USB interface in the temperatures, the USB storage device may
section on USB connections, refer to page 59. cause a reduction in the charging current.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored
data, do not charge a USB storage device via
the onboard socket, when it is connected to
the USB interface.
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device is
being used, settings may be required on the
212
USB storage device, refer to the owner's 2. Pry cover up a bit, arrow 1, and pull out of the
manual of the device. brackets toward the back, arrow 2.
Non-compatible USB media:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
serts.
▷ HFS-formatted USB media.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
Cargo area Front cover
Cargo cover
Safety information
WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐
1. Push cover out of the bracket upward on
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or
both sides, arrow 1.
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices 2. Pull cover out of the bracket toward the rear
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the on both sides, arrow 2.
car's interior.
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to reinstall. The
General information cargo covers must snap audibly into place on
The cargo cover is in two parts. This can be re‐ their respective holders.
moved to load bulky luggage.
Enlarging the cargo area
Removing
Concept
Rear cover Depending on the vehicle equipment, the cargo
1. Detach the retaining straps at the tailgate. area can be enlarged as follows:
▷ The rear seat backrests can be folded down.
▷ The rear seat backrests can be moved into an
upright loading position using the cargo set‐
ting.
213
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of 40– WARNING
20–40. The side rear seat backrests and the The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
center section can be folded down separately. ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the rear ment or improper installation of the child seat.
seat backrests can be folded down from the rear There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
or from the cargo area. sure that the child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
Safety information backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
WARNING If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
Danger of jamming with folding down the back‐ straints or remove them.
rests. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
ment of the rear backrest and the of the head NOTE
restraint is clear prior to folding down.
Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding
down the rear backrest. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Make sure that the area of
WARNING movement of the rear backrest including head
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured restraint is clear when folding down.
cargo can be thrown into the car's interior;
for instance, in the event of an accident, braking
or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Folding down the rear seat backrest
Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked from the rear
after folding it back.
WARNING
Unexpected movements of the backrest while
Pull the strap forward. The rear seat backrest
folds forward.
WARNING
With a rear backrest that is not locked, the pro‐
tective function of the middle safety belt is not
guaranteed. There is a risk of injuries or danger
to life. If you are using the middle safety belt,
lock the wider rear seat backrest.
214
Folding down the rear seat backrest Fold back the backrest
from the cargo area Without a cargo position:
1. Pull the strap.
Pull the switch inside the cargo area.

Left switch: the left and center rear seat back‐
2. Fold the rear seat backrest rearward.
rests fold forward.
With a cargo position:
Right switch: the right rear seat backrest folds
forward. 1. Pull the strap.
Cargo position
Concept
The rear seat backrests can be separately
moved through several tilt stages into an upright
loading position.
Settings
1. Pull the strap. 2. Fold the rear seat backrest rearward. The rear
seat backrest first engages in the loading po‐
sition.
3. Pull the strap again.
4. Fold rear seat backrest all the way back.
5. Latch the rear seat backrest.
2. Set the loading position of the rear seat back‐

rest as required.
3. Latch the rear seat backrest.
215
Cargo area partition net
Cargo area partition net, large

When the rear seat backrest is folded down, in‐
stall the large cargo area partition net behind the
front seats.
1. Fold down the rear seat backrests, refer to
page 213.
2. Open the lids above on the roof frame until
they engage. Cargo area partition net, small
With upright rear backrests, install the small
cargo area partition net behind the second row of
seats.
1. Remove the cargo cover.

2. Insert each of the two top retaining pins of
the cargo area partition net into the recepta‐
cles until they reach the stop, arrow 1, and
push them forward.
3. Insert each of the two top retaining pins of

the cargo area partition net into the recepta‐
cles until they reach the stop, arrow 1, and
push them forward.
3. Use the two lower hooks to hook the cargo

area partition net into the upper eyes in the
cargo area, arrow 2.
4. Hook the lower three hooks of the cargo area Ski and snowboard bag
partition net into the three eyes of the folded
down rear backrest, arrow 2, raising the back‐ The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
rests slightly, if needed. protective jacket in the cargo area.
Make sure that the lower hooks are hooked Follow the installation and owner's manual in‐
into the eyes from behind. cluded in the protective jacket.
216
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and ▷ Storage compartment up front in the center
console, refer to page 217.
options ▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 218.
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side, refer
to page 218.
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected ▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
options or country versions. This also applies to page 218.
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ ▷ Storage compartment in the center armrest,
ing these functions and systems, the applicable refer to page 218.
▷ Cup holder, refer to page 219.
▷ Storage compartment in the rear center con‐
Safety information sole, refer to page 219.
▷ Clothes hooks, refer to page 220
▷ Storage compartments in the cargo area, re‐
WARNING fer to page 220.
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐ ▷ Additional storage compartments in the car's
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, interior, refer to page 220
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is Storage compartment up
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
front in the center console
car's interior.
NOTE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can dam‐
age the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not use anti-slip pads.
Storage compartments in There is a storage compartment under the cover.
the car's interior

The following storage compartments are availa‐
ble in the car's interior:
217
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Glove compartment vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the

glove compartment immediately after using it.
Front passenger side

Opening
Safety information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
partment can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the
glove compartment immediately after using it. Pull the handle.
Opening Closing
Fold cover closed.
Compartments in the doors
WARNING
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
glasses, can break in the event of an accident
or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass
Pull the handle.
can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a
The light in the glove compartment switches on. risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not use any breakable objects while driving.
Only stow breakable objects in closed storage
Closing
compartments.
Fold cover closed.
Driver's side
Center armrest
Safety information
Front
WARNING A storage compartment is located in the center
Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes armrest between the front seats.
in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
partment can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
218
Opening to property. Use light-weight, unbreakable, and

sealable containers. Do not transport hot bever‐
ages. Do not force objects into the cup holder.
Front
Pull the lever, arrow 1, and fold the center arm‐

rest up, arrow 2.
Settings
The center armrest can be adjusted in several tilt Two cup holders are located under the cover.
settings.
Rear
Storage compartment in
the rear center console NOTE
With an open cup holder, the center armrest
cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of
damage to property. Press back the covers be‐
fore the center armrest is folded up.
In the center armrest.
A storage compartment is located in the center

console.
Cup holders
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
Safety information To open: press the button.
To close: push both covers back in, one after the
WARNING other.
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder and hot
beverages can damage the cup holder and in‐
crease the risk of injury in the event of an acci‐
dent. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
219
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Additional storage weight objects, for instance clothing articles,

from the clothes hooks.
compartments in the car's
interior
General information
The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
Storage compartment under the dles in the rear.
driver's seat
Storage compartments in
the cargo area
Side storage compartments, left
and right
Storage compartments are located on the right
and left sides.
Storage compartment for small objects.
Net for storage compartment
Nets on the backrests of the Smaller objects can be stored in the net of right
front seats storage compartment.
The nets on the backrests of the front seats can
also be used to store small parts. Multi-function hook
WARNING
Clothes hooks Improper use of the multi-function hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about during
Safety information braking and evasive maneuvers, for example.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. Only hang lightweight objects,
WARNING
such as shopping bags, from the multi-function
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can ob‐ hooks. Only transport heavy luggage in the
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of cargo area if it has been appropriately secured.
an accident. When suspending clothing articles
from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will
not obstruct the driver's view.
WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a
risk of objects flying about during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. Only hang light‐
220
A multi-function hook is located on each side of

the cargo area.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area

To secure the cargo, refer to page 229, there
are lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Storage space under cargo floor

panel
The cargo floor panel can be folded. To open the

cargo floor panel, lift slightly and push toward the
front.
221
222
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ........................................................ 224
Loading ..................................................................................................... 228
Saving fuel ................................................................................................ 231
223
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and Engine, transmission, and axle
drive
options
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
cific and optional features offered with the series. Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
It also describes features that are not necessarily speed:
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected ▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
options or country versions. This also applies to 100 mph/160 km/h.
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ Avoid full load or kickdown under all circumstan‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable ces.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Breaking-in period The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
General information Tires

Moving parts need to begin working together
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing
smoothly.
circumstances when tires are brand-new; they
The following instructions will help you to ach‐ achieve their full traction potential after a break-in
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency. time.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Control. Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Safety information
Brake system
WARNING Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
Due to new parts and components, safety and effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
driver assistance systems can react with a de‐ Drive moderately during this break-in period.
lay. There is a risk of an accident. After instal‐
ling new parts or with a new vehicle, drive con‐ Following part replacement
servatively and intervene early if necessary. The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
Observe the break-in procedures of the re‐ served if any of the components above-men‐
spective parts and components. tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
224
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
Driving on poor roads After a trip on poor roads

After a trip on poor roads, check wheels and tires
for damage to maintain driving safety. Clear
Concept
heavy soiling from the body.
Because of its greater ground clearance, the ve‐
hicle can be driven on a variety of road types and
qualities. General driving notes
All-wheel drive can help improve forward mo‐
mentum.
Closing the tailgate
Safety information Safety information
NOTE WARNING
Objects in unpaved areas, for instance stones An open tailgate protrudes from the vehicle and
or branches, can damage the vehicle. There is can endanger occupants and other traffic par‐
a risk of damage to property. Do not drive on ticipants or damage the vehicle in the event of
unpaved terrain. an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. In
addition, exhaust fumes may enter the car's in‐
terior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
When driving on poor roads to property. Do not drive with the tailgate open.
For your own safety, for the safety of passengers
and of the vehicle, heed the following points:
▷ Become familiar with the vehicle before start‐ Driving with the tailgate open
ing a trip; do not take risks while driving. If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
▷ Adjust the speed to the road surface condi‐ avoided:
tions. The steeper and more uneven the road ▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
surface, the slower the speed should be. ▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ When driving on steep uphill or downhill ▷ Drive moderately.
grades: add engine oil and coolant up to near
the MAX mark.
Hot exhaust gas system
▷ On steep downhill grades, use Hill Descent
Control HDC.
WARNING
▷ Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in con‐
tact with the ground. During driving operation, high temperatures can
occur underneath the vehicle body, for instance
The ground clearance is no more than 7.8 in‐
caused by the exhaust gas system. If combusti‐
ches/20 cm and can vary according to the ve‐
ble materials, such as leaves or grass, come in
hicle's load.
contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas sys‐
▷ When wheels continue to spin, depress the tem, these materials can ignite. There is a risk
accelerator so that driving stability control of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not
systems can distribute the driving force to the remove the heat shields installed and never ap‐
wheels. Activate DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ ply undercoating to them. Make sure that no
trol if available. combustible materials can come in contact with
hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle or
225
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
during parking. Do not touch the hot exhaust Safety information

gas system.
NOTE
Mobile communication devices When driving too quickly through too deep wa‐
in the vehicle ter, water can enter into the engine compart‐
ment, the electrical system or the transmission.
There is a risk of damage to property. When
WARNING driving through water, do not exceed the maxi‐
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can in‐ mum indicated water level and the maximum
fluence one another. There is radiation due to speed for driving through water.
the transmission operations of mobile phones.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. If possible, in the car's interior use Braking safely
only mobile phones with direct connections to
an exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual General information
interference and deflect the radiation from the The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard
car's interior. feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations that re‐
quire such.
Hydroplaning
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.
form between the tires and road surface.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning.
hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active
It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of
mode.
contact between the tires and the road surface,
ultimately undermining your ability to steer and
brake the vehicle. Objects in the movement area
around pedals and floor area
Driving through water
WARNING
General information Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
When driving through water, follow the following: pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
▷ Drive through calm water only. There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
the vehicle such that they are secured and can‐
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor
than maximum 9.8 in/25 cm.
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h. loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.
226
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
Driving in wet conditions Brake disc corrosion

When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, gen‐ Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination
tly press the brake pedal every few miles. on the brake pads are increased by the following
Ensure that this action does not endanger other circumstances:
traffic. ▷ Low mileage.
The heat generated during braking dries brake ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
discs and brake pads and protects them against used at all.
corrosion. ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
In this way braking efficiency will be available ▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
when you need it. agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a
Hills pulsating effect on the brakes in their response -
generally this cannot be corrected.
General information
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear Condensation water under the
that requires least braking effort. Otherwise, the
brakes may overheat and reduce brake effi‐
parked vehicle
ciency. When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops and collects under‐
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
neath the vehicle.
shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if
needed.
Safety information
Driving on racetracks
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
WARNING racetrack operation lead to increased wear. This
Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to wear is not covered by the warranty. The vehicle
high temperatures, brakes wearing out and is not designed for use in motor sports competi‐
possibly even brake failure. There is a risk of an tion.
accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on the
brake system.
WARNING
In idle state or with the engine switched off,
safety-relevant functions, for instance engine
braking effect, braking force boost and steering
assistance, are restricted or not available at all.
There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive in
idle state or with the engine switched off.
227
DRIVING TIPS Loading
Loading
WARNING
options Unexpected movements of the backrest while
ing these functions and systems, the applicable WARNING
laws and regulations must be observed. Improperly stowed objects can shift and be
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
Safety information sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.
WARNING
High gross weight can overheat the tires, dam‐
age them internally and cause a sudden drop in NOTE
tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
may be negatively impacted, reducing lane sta‐ There is a risk of damage to property. Make
bility, lengthening the braking distances and sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
changing the steering response. There is a risk
of an accident. Pay attention to the permitted
load capacity of the tires and never exceed the
permitted gross weight. Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit
WARNING
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐ of occupants and cargo should never exceed
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your ve‐
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
hicle.
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
car's interior. and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
228
Loading DRIVING TIPS
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb pas‐ ▷ If necessary, fold down the backrests to stow
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐ cargo.
ble cargo and luggage load capacity is ▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the
650 lbs. (1,400–750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) backrests.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage ▷ Use the cargo area partition net, refer to
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That page 216, to protect occupants. Make sure
weight may not safely exceed the available that objects cannot penetrate the cargo area
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in partition net.
Step 4.
▷ Smaller and light cargo: secure with ratchet
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load straps or draw straps.
from your trailer will be transferred to your ve‐
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
hicle. Consult this manual to determine how
straps.
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
Load area
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area for
the occupants and the cargo. securing cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps,
less cargo that can be transported.
retaining straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to the
lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Only use the lower lashing eyes to secure the
Stowing and securing cargo with the cargo area partition net.
cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo. Roof-mounted luggage
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible, rack
directly behind and at the bottom of the rear
passenger seat backrests.
General information
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
Installation only possible with roof rack.
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle. Roof racks are available as special accessories.
229
DRIVING TIPS Loading
Safety information
WARNING
When driving with a roof load, for instance with
roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐
ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk
of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐
tions. There is a risk of accidents or risk of
damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC
Dynamic Stability Control when driving with
roof load.
Securing
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they
have a major effect on vehicle handling and
steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading and
driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads
and the approved gross vehicle weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass sun‐
roof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bot‐
tom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance
using ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden accelera‐
tion and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
230
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and Close the windows and
options glass sunroof
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open
cific and optional features offered with the series. results in increased air resistance and thereby re‐
It also describes features that are not necessarily duces the range.
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ Tires
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
General information ways, for instance tire size may influence fuel
consumption.
The vehicle contains advanced technologies for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emission Check the tire inflation pressure
values. regularly
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
ferent factors. pressure at least twice a month and before start‐
Carrying out certain measures, such as a moder‐ ing on a long trip.
ate driving style and regular maintenance, can in‐ Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
fluence fuel consumption and the environmental sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
impact. tire wear.
Remove unnecessary Drive away immediately

cargo
Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
This is the quickest way of warming the cold en‐
Remove attached parts gine up to operating temperature.
following use
Look well ahead when
Remove roof-mounted luggage racks which are
no longer required following use. driving
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerody‐
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
namics and increase the fuel consumption.
consumption.
231
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.

Switch off any functions
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle
driving ahead of you.
that are not currently
needed
Avoid high engine speeds Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐
dow defroster require a lot of energy and reduce
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con‐ the range, especially in city and stop-and-go traf‐
sumption and reduces wear. fic.
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift indi‐ Switch off these functions if they are not needed.
cator, refer to page 136. The ECO PRO driving mode supports the en‐
ergy conserving use of comfort features. These
functions are automatically deactivated partially
Use coasting or completely.
When approaching a red light, take your foot off

the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. Have maintenance carried
For going downhill take your foot off the acceler‐
ator and let the vehicle roll.
out
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting. Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. BMW
recommends that maintenance work be per‐
Switch off the engine formed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
during longer stops For information on the BMW Maintenance Sys‐
tem, refer to page 271.
Switching off the engine
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for in‐ ECO PRO
stance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in
traffic congestion.
Concept
Auto Start/Stop function ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle auto‐ fuel consumption. For this purpose, the engine
matically switches off the engine during a stop. control and comfort features, for instance the cli‐
mate control output, are adjusted.
If the engine is switched off and then restarted
rather than leaving the engine running con‐ In addition, context-sensitive instructions are dis‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re‐ played to assist with an optimized fuel consump‐
duced. Savings can begin within a few seconds tion driving style.
of switching off the engine. The achieved extended range is displayed in the
In addition, fuel consumption is also determined instrument cluster as bonus range.
by other factors, such as driving style, road con‐
ditions, maintenance or environmental factors.
232
General information 4. "Configure ECO PRO"

The system includes the following 5. Select the desired setting.
EfficientDynamics functions and Settings are stored for the profile currently used.
EfficientDynamics displays:
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 234. Activating/deactivating the
▷ Activate/deactivate the display, refer to functions
page 234. The following functions can be activated/deacti‐
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to page 233. vated:
▷ Coasting driving condition, refer to page 235. ▷ "ECO PRO speed warning"
▷ Driving style analysis, refer to page 236. ▷ "ECO PRO climate control"
▷ "Coasting"
Overview Settings are stored for the driver profile currently
used.
ECO PRO limit

▷ Activate the ECO PRO limit:
"ECO PRO speed warning":
An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed of
the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded.
▷ Adjust the ECO PRO limit speed:
"Tip at:"
Driving Dynamics Control
Select the desired speed.
Activating ECO PRO ECO PRO climate control

"ECO PRO climate control"
Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO
is displayed in the instrument cluster. Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
That is, it is possible to deviate slightly from the
set temperature or to heat or cool the car's inte‐
Configuring ECO PRO
rior more slowly, to economize on fuel consump‐
tion.
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
In addition, the power output to the seat and mir‐
1. Activate ECO PRO.
ror heating is reduced.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
3. Select the desired setting. Coasting
Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengaging
Via iDrive the engine and coasting with the engine idling.
1. "My Vehicle" Deactivate the function to use the braking effect
2. "Vehicle settings" of the engine when traveling downhill.
233
ECO PRO potential savings Activating/deactivating the display

Shows potential savings with the current settings 1. "My Vehicle"
in percentages. 2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
ECO PRO bonus range 5. "ECO PRO info"
A modified driving style helps you

ECO PRO tip, symbols
extend your driving range.
An additional symbol and text instructions are
This may be displayed as the bo‐
displayed.
nus range in the instrument clus‐
ter. Symbol Measure
The bonus range is shown in the range display. For efficient driving back off the ac‐
The bonus range is automatically reset every celerator or delay accelerating to al‐
time the vehicle is refueled. low time to assess road conditions.
Reduce speed to the selected ECO

ECO PRO efficiency display PRO speed.
The color of the ECO PRO displays in the instru‐
ment cluster tell you how efficiently you are driv‐ Steptronic transmission:
ing: Switch from M/S to D and avoid
▷ Blue display: efficient driving style. manual shift interventions.
▷ Gray display: modify driving style, for example
by backing off the accelerator pedal. Indications on the Control
The display switches to blue as soon as all con‐ Display
ditions for driving with optimized fuel efficiency
are met. Displaying EfficientDynamics
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the information
ECO PRO displays also inform you about your The current efficiency of the ECO PRO functions
current driving style. This is indicated by a can be displayed on the Control Display.
pointer which moves along a scale. The pointer Via iDrive:
tells you whether energy is being consumed to
accelerate the vehicle or whether energy is being 1. "My Vehicle"
recovered through coasting or braking. If the 2. "Technology in action"
pointer remains in the blue range on the scale,
3. "EfficientDynamics"
you are driving efficiently.
ECO PRO tip, driving tip The following functions are displayed:
The ECO PRO tip indicates that your ▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
driving style can be modified to be more ▷ Energy recovery.
fuel efficient, for example by backing off ▷ Coasting.
the accelerator.
234
Displaying fuel consumption history This driving condition is referred to as coasting.

The average consumption can be displayed on As soon as you step on the brake or accelerator
the Control Display. pedal, the engine is automatically coupled again.
Via iDrive:
General information
1. "My Vehicle"
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO driv‐
2. "Technology in action" ing mode.
3. "EfficientDynamics" Coasting is automatically activated when ECO
4. Select the symbol. PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
Vertical bars show consumption for the selected Control.
time frame. A proactive driving style helps the driver to use
the function as often as possible and supports
Adjusting the fuel consumption the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.
history time frame
1. "My Vehicle"
The function is available in the speed range from
2. "Technology in action"
approx. 15 mph/25 km/h up to
3. "EfficientDynamics" 100 mph/160 km/h.
4. Select the symbol. The function is active if the following conditions
are met:
5. Press button.
▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal not de‐
6. Adjust the time frame. pressed.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position
Resetting fuel consumption history D.
1. "My Vehicle"
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
2. "Technology in action" temperature.
3. "EfficientDynamics" ▷ With a camera in the area of the interior mir‐
4. Select the symbol. ror: the system does not detect any vehicles
ahead of you.
5. Press button. ▷ With the route-ahead assistant: the system
6. "Reset consumption history" does not detect any obstructive traffic situa‐
tions or routes.
Coasting
Operation via shift paddles
Concept
Concept
This function helps to save fuel.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
To do this, under certain conditions the engine is coasting mode can be influenced with the shift
automatically decoupled from the transmission paddles.
when selector lever position D is set. The vehicle
continues traveling with the engine idling to re‐
duce fuel consumption. Selector lever position D
remains engaged.
235
Activating/deactivating coasting via shift ▷ If the vehicle electrical system is drawing ex‐
paddles cessive current.
1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right
shift paddle. Driving style analysis
2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the right
shift paddle again. Concept
To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle. The function helps develop an especially effi‐
cient driving style and to conserve fuel.
Display For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
Display in the instrument cluster and is displayed on the Control Display.
The mark in the efficiency display is backlit in This display will help you adjust your driving style
blue and is located at the zero point. The tach‐ and save some fuel.
ometer shows the idle speed. The last 15 minutes of a trip are evaluated.
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at the The range of the vehicle can be extended by
zero point during coasting. adopting an efficient driving style.
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range
Indications on the Control Display
in the instrument cluster and on the Control Dis‐
The coasting mode is displayed in play.
EfficientDynamics while driving.
The distance traveled in coasting mode is shown Functional requirement
in the fuel consumption history. The counter is This function is available in ECO PRO mode.
reset prior to every departure.
Calling up ECO PRO driving style
Displaying EfficientDynamics information
analysis
Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
3. "Driving style analysis"
Display on the Control Display
System limits
The function is not available if one of the follow‐
ing conditions applies:
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
▷ If cruise control is activated.
▷ If driving in the dynamic limit range.
▷ If driving on steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ If the battery charge state is temporarily too
low.
236
The display of the ECO PRO driving style analy‐

sis consists of a symbolized route and a lookup
table.
The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driving
style. The more efficient your driving style, the
smoother the depicted route becomes, arrow 1.
The table of values contains stars. The more effi‐
cient the driving style, the more stars are in‐
cluded in the table and the faster the bonus
range increases, arrow 2.
If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
cient, a more wavy road and a reduced number
of stars are displayed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during driving.
Tips for an energy-saving driving style, Saving
fuel, refer to page 231.
237
238
MOBILITY
Refueling ................................................................................................... 240
Fuel ............................................................................................................ 242
Wheels and tires ...................................................................................... 244
Engine compartment .............................................................................. 262
Engine oil .................................................................................................. 265
Coolant ...................................................................................................... 269
Maintenance ............................................................................................. 271
Replacing components .......................................................................... 273
Breakdown assistance ........................................................................... 283
Care ........................................................................................................... 289
239
MOBILITY Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle features and Fuel cap
options
Opening
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
cific and optional features offered with the series. flap.
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
page 242, prior to refueling.
Safety information
NOTE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
property. Refuel promptly. the fuel filler flap.
240
Refueling MOBILITY
Closing Safety information
WARNING NOTE
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jam‐ Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the
med and crushed during closing. The cap can‐ fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted
not be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel.
escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐ Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There
age to property. Pay attention that the retaining is a risk of damage to property. Avoid overfilling.
strap is not jammed or crushed when closing
the cap.
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you

clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap

E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction.
Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s service
pair shop.
Follow the following when

refueling
General information
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely
into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle
during refueling causes:
▷ Premature switching off.
▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly af‐
ter refueling, otherwise the emissions warning
light may light up.
Follow safety regulations posted at the gas sta‐
tion.
241
MOBILITY Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle features and Safety information
options
NOTE
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
cific and optional features offered with the series. ing with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the cata‐
It also describes features that are not necessarily lytic converter is permanently damaged. There
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected is a risk of damage to property. Do not refuel or
options or country versions. This also applies to add the following in the case of gasoline en‐
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ gines:
ing these functions and systems, the applicable ▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, for instance manganese
or iron.
Fuel recommendation Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
General information repair shop.
Depending on the region, many gas stations sell
fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in win‐
NOTE
ter, for instance helps make a cold start easier.
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and
the engine. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
Gasoline
erty. Do not use fuels with a higher percentage
of ethanol than recommended. Do not refuel
General information with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 to
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should M100.
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used. NOTE
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %, Fuel that does not comply with the minimum
i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refueling. quality can compromise engine function or
Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐ cause engine damage. There is a risk of dam‐
dards: age to property. Do not fill with fuel that does
US: ASTM 4806–xx not comply with the minimum quality.
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
242
Fuel MOBILITY
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐
ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and
stalling, especially under certain environmental
conditions such as high ambient temperature
and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐
chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled mainte‐
nance.
Recommended fuel grade

BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade

BMW recommends AKI 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating,
the engine may produce knocking sounds when
starting at high external temperatures. This has
no effect on the engine life.
243
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and Tire inflation pressure
specifications
options
In the tire inflation pressure table
cific and optional features offered with the series. The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
It also describes features that are not necessarily page 245, contains all tire inflation pressure
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
options or country versions. This also applies to ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ values apply to tire sizes approved by the manu‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable facturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type.
laws and regulations must be observed. To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Tire inflation pressure
▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
General information Checking the tire inflation

The tire inflation pressure and tire characteristics pressure
influence the following:
▷ The service life of the tires. General information
▷ Road safety. Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation
▷ Driving comfort. pressure increases with the tire temperature.
▷ Driving dynamics. Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure.
▷ Fuel consumption.
The displays of inflation devices may under-read
Safety information by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Checking using tire inflation

WARNING pressure specifications in the tire
A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure inflation pressure table
may heat up significantly and sustain damage. The tire inflation pressure specifications in the
This will have a negative impact on aspects of tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold
handling, such as steering and braking re‐ tires or tires at the same temperature as the am‐
sponse. There is a risk of an accident. Regularly bient temperature.
check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it
as needed, for instance twice a month and be‐ Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when
fore a long trip. the tires are cold, i.e.:
▷ Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not
been exceeded.
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at least
2 hours after a trip.
244
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Also check the tire inflation pressure of the Tire inflation pressure values up
emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and to 100 mph/160 km/h
correct it as needed.
1. Determine, refer to page 244, the intended sDrive28i, xDrive28i

tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted
tires. Tire size Pressure specifications in
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four bar/PSI
tires, using a pressure gage, for example. Specifications
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the cur‐ in bar/PSI with
rent tire inflation pressure value deviates from cold tires
the specified value.
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed
225/50 R 18 2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32
onto the tire valves.
95 V M+S A/S
Std/RSC
After correcting the tire inflation
225/50 R 18
pressure
95 W RSC
For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.
225/50 R 18
For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the 95 H M+S
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM. RSC
Tire inflation pressures up to 225/45 R 19 2.5 / 36 2.5 / 36

92 W RSC
100 mph/160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for Emergency Speed up to a max. of
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐ wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
ues in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to T 135/90 R 17 4.2 / 60
page 245, and adjust as necessary. 104 M
Tire inflation pressures at max.

speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
WARNING
In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess
of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if
necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds ex‐
These pressure values can also be found on the ceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant
tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door table on the following pages. Otherwise, tire
pillar. damage and accidents could occur.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h. For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for opti‐
mum driving comfort, note the pressure values in
the tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 246, and adjust as necessary.
245
Tire inflation pressure values Tire size Pressure specifications in

over 100 mph/160 km/h bar/PSI
Specifications
sDrive28i, xDrive28i in bar/PSI with
Without high-speed tuning feature cold tires
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI 225/50 R 18 2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41
Specifications 95 V M+S A/S
in bar/PSI with Std/RSC
cold tires 225/50 R 18
95 H M+S
RSC
225/50 R 18 2.5 / 36 2.5 / 36
225/50 R 18
95 V M+S A/S
95 W RSC
Std/RSC
225/50 R 18 225/45 R 19 3.0 / 44 3.0 / 44
95 H M+S 92 W RSC
RSC
Emergency Speed up to a max. of
225/50 R 18 wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
95 W RSC
T 135/90 R 17 4.2 / 60
225/45 R 19 2.7 / 39 2.7 / 39 104 M
92 W RSC
Emergency Speed up to a max. of

wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
Tire identification marks
T 135/90 R 17 4.2 / 60
104 M Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
With high-speed tuning feature 245: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Maximum tire load

Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible
weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall
and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR – on
the certification label on the driver’s door pillar.
246
Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature
than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight A
Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and
tire loads, respectively. DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Speed letter
Traction AA A B C
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
Temperature A B C
R = up to 106 mph/170 km/h
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Fed‐
S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h eral Safety Requirements in addition to these
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h grades.
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h Treadwear
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
Tire Identification Number would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0118 on the government course as a tire graded 100.
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
xxx: tire size and tire design may depart significantly from the norm due to
0118: tire age variations in driving habits, service practices and
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the differences in road characteristics and climate.
U.S. Department of Transportation.
Traction
Tire age The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Recommendation Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at least on wet pavement as measured under controlled
every 6 years. conditions on specified government test surfa‐
ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
Manufacture date have poor traction performance.
You can find the manufacture date of the tire on The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
the tire's sidewall. on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐
Designation Manufacture date planing, or peak traction characteristics.
DOT … 0118 1st week, 2018
Temperature
Uniform Tire Quality Grading The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
when tested under controlled conditions on a
maximum section width.
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
247
high temperature can cause the material of the Minimum tread depth
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces‐
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of perform‐
ance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
WARNING
Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's
The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐ circumference and have the legally required min‐
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not imum height of 0.063 inches/1.6 mm.
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in com‐ The positions of the wear indicators are marked
bination, can cause heat buildup and possible on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indica‐
tire failure. tor.
RSC – Run-flat tires Tire damage

Run-flat tires, refer to page 251, are labeled with
a circular symbol containing the letters RSC General information
marked on the sidewall. Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
M+S Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as
Winter and all-season tires with better cold well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
weather performance than summer tires. cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
Tire tread between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐
Summer tires pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro‐
file tires.
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
risk of hydroplaning. functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations.
Winter tires ▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for to pull to the left or right.
winter operation.
Damage can be caused by the following situa‐
tions, for instance:
▷ Driving over curbs.
▷ Road damage.
248
▷ Tire inflation pressure too low. about the correct wheel/tire combination and
▷ Vehicle overloading. wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
▷ Incorrect tire storage.

Safety information
Safety information
WARNING
WARNING Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your
vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for in‐
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure, stance due to contact with the body due to tol‐
which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There erances despite the same official size rating.
is a risk of an accident. If tire damage is sus‐ There is a risk of an accident. The manufac‐
pected while driving, immediately reduce speed turer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you
and stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For use wheels and tires that have been recom‐
this purpose, drive carefully to the nearest deal‐ mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your
er’s service center or another qualified service vehicle type.
center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or
transported as needed. Do not repair damaged
tires, but have them replaced.
WARNING
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will have a
WARNING negative impact on the vehicle's handling and
on the function of a variety of systems, such as
Tires can become damaged by driving over ob‐ ABS or DSC. There is a risk of an accident. To
stacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high maintain good handling and vehicle response,
speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross- use only tires with a single tread configuration
section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the from a single manufacturer. The manufacturer
higher the risk of tire damage. There is a dan‐ of the vehicle recommends that you use
ger of accidents and property damage. If possi‐ wheels and tires that have been recommended
ble, drive around obstacles, or drive over them by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle
slowly and carefully. type. Following tire damage, have the original
wheel/tire combination remounted on the vehi‐
cle as soon as possible.
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out
by a dealer’s service center or another qualified
Wheel and tire combination
General information
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
249
Recommended tire brands Maximum speed of winter tires

If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then attach a label showing the permissible maxi‐
mum speed in the field of view. The label is avail‐
able from a dealer’s service center or another
With winter tires mounted, observe and do not
exceed the permissible maximum speed.
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi‐ Run-flat tires
cle recommends certain tire brands. The tire If you are already using run-flat tires, for your own
brands can be identified by a star on the tire safety you should replace them only with the
sidewall. same kind. No spare tire is available in the case
of a flat tire. Further information is available from
New tires service center or repair shop.
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing
circumstances when tires are brand-new; they Rotating wheels between axles
achieve their full traction potential after a break-in
time. Different wear patterns can occur on the front
and rear axles depending on individual driving
Drive conservatively for the first conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs be‐
200 miles/300 km. tween the axles to achieve even wear. Further in‐
formation is available from a dealer’s service cen‐
Retreaded tires ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and
WARNING correct, if needed.
Retreaded tires can have different tire casing

structures. With advanced age the service life
Storing tires
can be limited. There is a risk of an accident.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ Air pressure
ommend the use of retreaded tires. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
ommend the use of retreaded tires. Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark
Winter tires place.
Winter tires are recommended for operating on Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
winter roads. grease, and solvents.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires provide Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
better winter traction than summer tires, they Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
usually do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
250
Run-flat tires Repairing a flat tire

Concept Safety measures
Run-flat tires permit continued driving under re‐ ▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from
stricted conditions even in the event of a com‐ passing traffic and on solid ground.
plete loss of tire inflation pressure. ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
General information setting the parking brake.
The wheels consist of tires that are self-support‐ ▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels
ing, to a limited degree, and possibly special are in the straight-ahead position and engage
rims. the steering wheel lock.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to re‐ ▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐
main drivable to a restricted degree in the event hicle and ensure that they remain outside the
of a tire inflation pressure loss. immediate area in a safe place, such as be‐
Follow the instructions for continued driving with hind a guardrail.
a flat tire. ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Safety information
WARNING
Mobility System
Your vehicle handles differently with a run-flat
with no or low inflation pressure; for instance, Concept
your lane stability when braking is reduced, With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can
braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐ be sealed temporarily to enable continued travel.
ing properties will change. There is a risk of an To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the
accident. tires, which seals the damage from the inside.
50 mph/80 km/h. General information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobility
System found on the compressor and sealant
Label container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop if the
tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies that
have penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign
objects if they are visibly protruding from the
The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with tire.
RSC Run-flat System Component.
251
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant 4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
container and apply it to the steering wheel.
5 On/off switch
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
6 Compressor
wheel electronics. In this case, have the TPM
wheel electronics replaced at the next oppor‐ 7 Connector/cable for socket
tunity. 8 Connection hose
▷ The compressor can be used to check the
tire inflation pressure.
Filling the tire with sealant
Overview Safety information
Storage
DANGER
The Mobility System is located under the cargo
floor panel. If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
Sealant container the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
ficient ventilation.
NOTE
The compressor can overheat during extended
operation. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
erty. Do not run the compressor for more than
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2. 10 minutes.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
Filling
Compressor
1. Shake the sealant container.
1 Sealant container unlocking

2 Sealant container holder
3 Tire pressure gage
252
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover of 5. With the compressor switched off, insert the
the sealant container. Do not kink the hose. plug into the power socket inside the vehicle.
3. Slide the sealant container into the holder on 6. With the ignition switched on or the engine
the compressor housing, ensuring that it en‐ running, switch on the compressor.
gages audibly.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill

4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant container the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation
onto the tire valve of the nonworking wheel. pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire
inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx.
5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor at this
point.
Checking and adjusting the tire

inflation pressure
Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of at
least 2 bar must be reached.
253
Removing and stowing the sealant center or another qualified service center or
container repair shop.
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐ If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is
tainer from the tire valve. reached, see Minimum tire inflation pressure
is reached.
2. Press the red unlocking device.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
3. Remove the sealant container from the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
pressor.
7. Pull the connector out of the power socket
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in suita‐
inside the vehicle.
ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.
8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is
not reached Minimum tire inflation pressure is
1. Pull the connector out of the power socket
reached
inside the vehicle. 1. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
pressor from the tire valve.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to distrib‐
ute the sealant in the tire. 2. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
3. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tire valve stem. 3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to
ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in
the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
Adjustment
1. Stop at a suitable location.
4. Insert the connector into the power socket in‐
2. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐
side the vehicle.
sor directly onto the tire valve stem.
5. With the ignition switched on or the engine

running, switch on the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar can‐
not be reached, contact your dealer’s service
254
3. Insert the connector into the power socket in‐

side the vehicle.
Snow chains
Safety information
WARNING
With the mounting of snow chains on unsuita‐
ble tires, the snow chains can come into con‐
tact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of acci‐
dents or risk of damage to property. Only
mount snow chains on tires that are designated
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of
2.0 bar. snow chains.
▷ Increase tire inflation pressure: with the ig‐
nition switched on or the engine running,
switch on the compressor. WARNING
▷ To reduce the pressure: press the button Insufficiently tight snow chains may damage
on the compressor. tires and vehicle components. There is a risk of
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ accidents or risk of damage to property. Make
pressor from the tire valve. sure that the snow chains are always suffi‐
ciently tight. Re-tighten as needed according to
6. Pull the connector out of the power socket the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.
inside the vehicle.
7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Fine-link snow chains
Continuing the trip The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
of 50 mph/80 km/h. fine-link snow chains have been tested by the
Reinitialize the run-flat tires. manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
as road-safe and suitable.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant con‐ available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
tainer of the Mobility System at the next opportu‐ other qualified service center or repair shop.
nity.
Use
Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 205/60 R 17.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Do not initialize the run-flat tires after mounting
snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect
readings.
255
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM af‐ a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not place
ter mounting snow chains, as doing so may re‐ supports under the vehicle jack.
sult in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, if needed. WARNING
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is
Maximum speed with snow provided in order to perform a wheel change in
chains the event of a breakdown. The jack is not de‐
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when signed for frequent use; for example, changing
using snow chains. from summer to winter tires. Using the jack fre‐
quently may cause it to become jammed or
damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of
Changing wheels/tires damage to property. Only use the jack to attach
an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a
breakdown.
General information
When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a wheel
does not always need to be changed immedi‐ WARNING
ately when there is a loss of tire inflation pressure
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example
due to a flat tire.
snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are away. There is a risk of injury. If possible,
available as accessories from a dealer’s service change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-re‐
center or another qualified service center or re‐ sistant surface.
pair shop.
Safety information WARNING

The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehi‐
DANGER cle and for the jacking points on the vehicle
The vehicle jack is only provided for short-term only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any
lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack.
all safety measures are observed, there is a risk
of the raised vehicle falling, if the vehicle jack
tips over. There is a risk of injuries or danger to WARNING
life. If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the jacking
vehicle and do not start the engine.
point provided for this purpose, the vehicle may
be damaged or the vehicle jack may slip when
it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or
DANGER risk of damage to property. When cranking up
Supports such as wooden blocks under the ve‐ the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted in the
hicle jack reduce the capacity of the vehicle jacking point next to the wheel housing.
jack to bear weight. They have the potential to
exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, caus‐
ing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is
256
On a slight downhill gradient

WARNING
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall
off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. While the vehicle is raised, do not ex‐
ert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly
on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by
If you need to change a wheel on a slight down‐

hill grade, place chocks and other suitable ob‐
Securing the vehicle against
jects, for instance a rock, under the wheels of
rolling both the front and rear axles against the rolling
direction.
General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to addi‐
tionally secure the vehicle against rolling away Lug bolt lock
when changing a wheel.
Concept
On a level surface The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The
lug bolts can only be released with the adapter
which matches the coding.
Overview
The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the onboard
vehicle tool kit or in a storage compartment close
to the onboard vehicle tool kit.
Place chocks or other suitable objects, for exam‐

ple a rock, in front of and behind the wheel that is
diagonally opposite to the wheel that you wish to
change.
▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.

▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing
1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
257
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug Jacking points for the vehicle
bolt. jack
Screwing on
1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If neces‐
sary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug
bolt.
2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening torque
is 140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screw‐
ing on the lug bolt.
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
Preparing the vehicle cated at the indicated positions.
▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground
at a safe distance from traffic.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to
position P.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have
all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
and ensure that they remain outside the im‐
mediate area in a safe place, such as behind a
guardrail.
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, get
wheel change tools and, if necessary, the
emergency wheel from the vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or port‐
able hazard warning light at an appropriate
distance.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
258
Jacking up the vehicle 3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle
jack crank or lever clockwise.
WARNING
Hands and fingers can be jammed when using
the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Com‐
ply with the described hand position and do not
change this position while using the vehicle
jack.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, arrow 1,

and grasp the vehicle jack crank with your
other hand, arrow 2. 4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as
soon as the vehicle jack is under load and
continue turning the vehicle jack crank or
lever with one hand.
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
vertically and at a right angle beneath the
jacking point.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular re‐

cess of the jacking point closest to the wheel
to be changed.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands

vertically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle jack.
7. Crank up the vehicle jack until the entire sur‐

face of the jack is in contact with the ground
and the wheel in question is raised a maxi‐
mum of 1.2 inches/3 cm off the ground.
259
Mounting a wheel tive tire. The emergency wheel is only intended

for temporary use until the defective tire/wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.
has been replaced.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel. General information
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on Mount one emergency wheel only.
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a cross‐ Also check the tire inflation pressure of the
wise pattern until hand-tight. emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle correct it as needed.
manufacturer are mounted, the accompany‐
ing lug bolts may have to be used as well. Safety information
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐ WARNING
tern.
The emergency wheel has particular dimen‐
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclockwise sions. When driving with an emergency wheel,
to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehi‐ changed driving properties may occur, for in‐
cle. stance reduced lane stability when braking, lon‐
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it securely. ger braking distance, and changed self-steering
properties in the limit area. There is a risk of an
After the wheel change accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tighten‐ speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
ing torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area, Overview
if necessary.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored un‐
der the cargo floor panel because of its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the run-flat tires.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
The emergency wheel and the wheel change
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the near‐
tools are located in the cargo area under the
est dealer’s service center or another quali‐
cargo floor panel.
fied service center or repair shop.
Removing the emergency wheel

Emergency wheel 1. Pull up and remove the cargo floor panel.
2. Unscrew the butterfly screw.
Concept
3. Remove the retaining plate or the cover.
In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel
can be used in place of the wheel with the defec‐
260
4. Where applicable, remove the holder and the

trailer hitch.
5. Remove the jacking point and the tool holder
on the left next to the emergency wheel.
6. Slide the emergency wheel to the left and re‐
move it.
Inserting the emergency wheel

1. Insert the emergency wheel on the left and
slide it to the right.
2. Where applicable, mount the holder and the
trailer hitch.
3. Attach the retaining plate or the cover.
4. Screw on and tighten the butterfly screw.
5. Insert and secure the jacking point and the
tool holder on the left next to the emergency
wheel.
6. Insert the cargo floor panel.
261
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Overview
1 Filler neck for washer fluid 4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal

2 Vehicle identification number 5 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
3 Oil filler neck 6 Coolant reservoir
262
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Hood
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when opening and
Safety information closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the hood is
WARNING clear during opening and closing.
Improperly executed work in the engine com‐
partment can damage vehicle components and
impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of per‐ NOTE
sonal and property damage. The manufacturer Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the
of your vehicle recommends that, in the effort hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
to avoid such risks, work in the engine com‐ property. Make sure that the wipers with the
partment be performed by a dealer’s service wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
center or another qualified service center or re‐ the windshield before opening the hood.
pair shop.
NOTE
WARNING
When the hood is closed, it must engage on
The engine compartment accommodates mov‐ both sides. Pressing again can damage the
ing components. Certain components in the hood. There is a risk of damage to property.
engine compartment can also move with the Open the hood again and then close it energet‐
vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator ically. Avoid pressing again.
fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into
the area of moving parts. Keep articles of cloth‐
ing and hair away from moving parts. Opening the hood
1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
WARNING
There are protruding parts, for instance locking
hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk
of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to
protruding parts and keep clear of these areas.
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open while driv‐
ing and restrict visibility. There is a risk of an ac‐
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again,
cident. Stop immediately and correctly close
arrow 2.
the hood.
Hood can be opened.
When the hood is unlocked, a Check Control
message is displayed.
263
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Closing the hood
Energetically close the hood from approx.

20 in/50 cm.
The hood must engage on both sides.
264
Engine oil MOBILITY
Engine oil
NOTE
options Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not add too much engine
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have
the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐
repair shop.
Electronic oil measurement
General information
General information
The engine oil consumption is dependent on The electronic oil measurement has two measur‐
your driving style and driving conditions. ing principles:
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level af‐ ▷ Monitoring.
ter refueling by taking a detailed measurement. ▷ Detailed measurement.
The engine oil consumption can increase in the When making frequent short-distance trips or
following situations, for example: using a dynamic driving style, for instance when
▷ Sporty driving style. taking curves aggressively, regularly perform a
▷ Break-in of the engine. detailed measurement.
▷ Idling of the engine.

Monitoring
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classified
as not suitable. Concept
Different Check Control messages appear on the The engine oil level is monitored electronically
Control Display depending on the engine oil while driving and can be shown on the Control
level. Display.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
Safety information operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
A red indicator light indicates that the en‐
NOTE gine oil pressure is too low.
An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to Functional requirements
property. Immediately add engine oil.
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving.
265
MOBILITY Engine oil
Displaying the engine oil level 4. "Measure engine oil level"

Via iDrive: 5. "Start measurement"
1. "My Vehicle" The engine oil level is checked and displayed via
a scale.
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed. Adding engine oil
System limits General information
When making frequent short-distance trips or Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
using a dynamic driving style, it may not be pos‐ played in the instrument cluster. The quantity to
sible to calculate a measured value. In this case, be added is indicated in the message displayed
the measured value for the last, sufficiently long in the instrument cluster.
trip is displayed.
Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to
page 267.
Detailed measurement
Safely park the vehicle and switch off the ignition
before adding engine oil.
Concept
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
The engine oil level is checked when the vehicle
is stationary and displayed via a scale.
Safety information
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed. WARNING
Operating materials, for instance oils, greases,
General information coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients.
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Fol‐
creased somewhat. low the instructions on the containers. Avoid
the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes
Functional requirements with operating materials. Do not refill operating
materials into different bottles. Store operating
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
materials out of reach of children.
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in se‐
lector lever position N or P and accelerator
pedal not depressed.
NOTE
▷ Engine is running and is at operating temper‐
An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐
ature.
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.
Performing a detailed measurement
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
266
Engine oil MOBILITY
Safety information
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or NOTE
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not add too much engine Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a
oil. When too much engine oil is added, have risk of damage to property. Do not use oil addi‐
the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv‐ tives.
repair shop.
NOTE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in
Overview the engine or damage it. There is a risk of dam‐
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐ age to property. When selecting an engine oil,
partment, refer to page 262. make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil
rating.
Adding engine oil
1. Open the hood, refer to page 263.
Suitable engine oil types
2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating
standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
Alternative engine oil types

If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not
3. Add engine oil. available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil
4. Close the cap. with the following oil rating can be added:
Oil rating
Engine oil types to add API SL.
API SM.
General information
API SN.
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Only add the types of engine oil which are listed.
Viscosity grades
Viscosity grades
SAE 0W-20.
SAE 0W-30.
267
MOBILITY Engine oil
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐

ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or another
Engine oil change
NOTE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion
can cause increased engine wear and thus en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
cated in the vehicle.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you

have a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop change the en‐
gine oil.
268
Coolant MOBILITY
Coolant
Vehicle features and Coolant level
options
Concept
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Depending on the engine installation, the coolant
cific and optional features offered with the series. reservoir is located on the right side or the left
It also describes features that are not necessarily side of the engine compartment.
Checking
ing these functions and systems, the applicable There are yellow Min and Max marks in the cool‐
laws and regulations must be observed. ant reservoir.
1. Let the engine cool.
General information 2. Open the hood.

3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
Not all commercially available additives are suita‐ counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
ble for the vehicle. Information about suitable ad‐ sure to dissipate, then open it.
ditives is available from a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling system
open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding. 4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling
5. The coolant level is correct if it lies between
system with the engine cooled down.
the minimum and maximum marks in the filler
neck.
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect additives
can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. Do not allow
additives to come into contact with skin, eyes
or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives
only.
269
MOBILITY Coolant
Adding
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐
sure to dissipate, then open it.
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to

the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Close the cap.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated
as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmental
protection regulations when disposing of
coolant and coolant additives.
270
Maintenance MOBILITY
Maintenance
Vehicle features and General information
options Information on service requirements, refer to
page 135, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
It also describes features that are not necessarily Service data in the remote
available in your vehicle, e. g., due to the selected control
options or country versions. This also applies to Information on the required maintenance is con‐
safety-related functions and systems. When us‐ tinuously stored in the remote control. The deal‐
ing these functions and systems, the applicable er’s service center can read this data out and
laws and regulations must be observed. suggest a maintenance scope for the vehicle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
BMW maintenance system recently.
The maintenance system indicates required

maintenance measures, and thereby provides
Storage periods
support in maintaining road safety and the opera‐ Storage periods during which the vehicle battery
tional reliability of the vehicle. was disconnected are not taken into account.
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the main‐ If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
tenance system may vary according to the coun‐ another qualified service center or repair shop
try version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels update the time-dependent maintenance proce‐
and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated dures, such as checking brake fluid and, if neces‐
separately. Further information is available from a sary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐ activated-charcoal filter.
ice center or repair shop.
Service and Warranty

Condition Based Service Information Booklet for US
CBS models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Concept
Sensors and special algorithms take into account
Canadian models
the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor‐
these to calculate the need for maintenance.
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and
The system makes it possible to adapt the Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for
amount of maintenance corresponding to your additional information on service requirements.
user profile.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
271
MOBILITY Maintenance
ice center or repair shop. Records of regular Position

maintenance and repair work should be retained.
Socket for OBD Onboard

Diagnosis
General information
Devices connected at the OBD socket trigger
the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Re‐
move any devices connected at the OBD socket There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
before locking the vehicle. checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Safety information
Emissions
NOTE ▷ The warning light lights up:
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intri‐ Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
cate component intended to be used in con‐ vehicle checked as soon as possible.
junction with specialized equipment to check
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
the vehicle’s primary emissions system. Im‐
cumstances:
proper use of the socket for Onboard Diagno‐
sis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Di‐ This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
agnosis for other than its intended purpose, in the engine.
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
risks of personal and property damage. Given tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
strongly recommends that access to the socket ously damage emission control components,
for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's in particular the catalytic converter.
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop or other persons that have
the specialized training and equipment for pur‐
poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐
board Diagnosis.
272
Replacing components MOBILITY
Replacing components
NOTE
options Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the
hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to
property. Make sure that the wipers with the
wiper blades mounted are folded down onto
the windshield before opening the hood.
Replacing the front wiper blades
laws and regulations must be observed. 1. To change the wiper blades, move the wipers
into their fold-away position, refer to
page 116.
Onboard vehicle tool kit 2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Press button, arrow 1, and pull out the wiper
blade.
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located under the

cargo floor panel.
4. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order of
removal until it locks in place.
Wiper blades 5. Fold down the wipers.
Safety information
NOTE
The window may sustain damage if the wiper
falls onto it without the wiper blade installed.
There is a risk of damage to property. Hold the
wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do
not fold or switch on the wiper without a wiper
blade installed.
273
MOBILITY Replacing components
Replacing the rear wiper blade Safety information

1. Lift the wiper up fully and pull off the wiper
blade, arrow. Lights and bulbs
WARNING
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Contact
with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a risk
of injury. Only change bulbs after they have
cooled off.
WARNING
2. Position the new wiper blade and press it on
Work on switched-on lighting systems can
until it you hear it snap into place.
cause short circuits. There is a risk of injury or
3. Fold the wipers in. risk of damage to property. When working on
the lighting system, switch off the lights in
question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐
Light and bulb replacement turer's instructions.
General information
NOTE
Lights and bulbs Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life. There is
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution a risk of damage to property. Do not hold new
to vehicle safety. bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean cloth
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you or something similar, or hold the bulb by its
have the relevant work carried out a dealer’s base.
or repair shop.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
A spare light box is available from a dealer’s serv‐
repair shop. WARNING
Follow the safety information, refer to page 274. Intensive brightness can irritate or damage the
retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) look directly into the headlights or other light
sources. Do not remove the LED covers.
Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐
odes installed behind a cover as a light source.
These light-emitting diodes are related to con‐
Headlight glass
ventional lasers and are officially designated as
Class 1 light-emitting diodes. Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When driv‐
Follow the safety information, refer to page 274.
ing with the lights switched on, the condensation
evaporates after a short time. The headlight
glass does not need to be changed.
274
If despite driving with the headlights switched on, Accessing the turn signals, low beams,
increasing humidity forms, for instance water high beams/headlight flasher
droplets in the light, have the headlights Follow the safety information, refer to page 274.
checked.
Open the hood, refer to page 263.
Headlight setting Turn signal

The headlight adjustments can be affected by Bulb A2357
changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight ad‐
justment was changed, have it checked and, if 1. Access to the turn signal on the right side:
necessary, corrected by a dealer’s service center unhook and fold away the filler neck for the
or another qualified service center or repair shop. wiper fluid with the screwdriver from the on‐
board vehicle tool kit.
Front lights, bulb replacement
Halogen headlights
Overview
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and

remove.
1 High beams, headlight flasher

2 Low beams
3 Side marker lights
4 Turn signal
5 Parking lights / daytime running lights.
6 Parking lights / daytime running lights. 3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
Parking lights, daytime running lights 4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in reverse
The parking lights and daytime running lights are order of removal.
made using LED technology.
Low beams
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service center 55 watt bulb, H7LL.
or repair shop. 1. Access to the low beams on the right side:
unhook and fold away the filler neck for the
275
wiper fluid with the screwdriver from the on‐ High beams/headlight flasher
board vehicle tool kit. 55-watt bulb, H7.
1. Turn the cover counterclockwise and re‐

move.
2. Turn the cover counterclockwise and re‐

move.
2. Pull the bulb holder directly to the rear, ar‐

row 1, and remove.
3. Pull the bulb holder directly to the rear, ar‐

row 1, and remove.
3. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder.

4. Install the new bulb with bulb holder in re‐
verse order of removal.
In doing so, ensure that the bulb tab is cor‐
rectly positioned in the headlight housing and
the bulb holder perceptibly engages.
5. Close the headlight housing with the lid.
Make sure that the lid engages.
4. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder.
5. Install the new bulb with bulb holder in re‐
verse order of removal.
In doing so, ensure that the bulb tab is cor‐
rectly positioned in the headlight housing and
the bulb holder perceptibly engages.
6. Close the headlight housing with the lid.
Make sure that the lid engages.
276
LED headlights wiper fluid with the screwdriver from the on‐
board vehicle tool kit.
Overview
Front lights
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and

remove.
1 Parking lights / daytime running lights

3 Turn signal
4 Low beams, high beams/headlight flasher
5 Cornering light
Front lights
The following lights feature LED technology: 3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn
▷ High beams counterclockwise and remove.
▷ Parking lights / daytime running lights 4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in reverse
order of removal.
▷ Low beams
▷ Cornering light Halogen front fog lights
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s Follow the safety information, refer to page 274.
or repair shop.
Turn signal
Bulb A2357
Accessing the turn signals

Open the hood.
1. Access to the turn signal on the right side:

unhook and fold away the filler neck for the
277
35-watt bulb, H8. contact a dealer’s service center or another

1. Insert the screwdriver from the onboard vehi‐
cle tool kit, with the flat side on the clip, ar‐
row 1. Tail lights, bulb replacement
Vehicles with halogen headlights
2. Turn the screwdriver by 90°, arrow 2.

3. Remove the front fog light toward the front.
4. Detach the connector.
2 Turn signal
3 Reversing light
4 Inside brake light
5 Tail lights
6 Brake lights/tail lights
Vehicles featuring LED headlights
5. Turn the bulb bracket and remove it.
1 Turn signal
2 Reversing light
6. Remove the bulb and replace it. 3 Inside brake light
7. Proceed in reverse order to insert the front 4 Tail lights
fog light. Note the guide rails in doing so. 5 Brake light
Turn signal in exterior mirror The tail lights feature LED technology. In the
case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s service
The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
LED technology. In the case of a malfunction,
pair shop.
278
Bulb replacement, exterior tail lights Remove the bulb holder from the tail light, ar‐
row 2.
General information
Turn signal: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL.
Outer brake light: 21 watt bulb, P21WLL.
Removing the exterior tail light

1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove the fastening using the screw driver
from the onboard vehicle tool kit, arrow 1. 2. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the
Remove cover, arrow 2. socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
▷ Upper bulb: turn signal.
▷ Lower bulb: brake light.
3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make
sure that the bulb holder engages in all fas‐
teners.
Installing the tail light

1. Connect the plug and mount the wiring on
3. Loosen both nuts, arrow 1, of the outer tail the tail light, arrow 1.
light. Use the handle of the screwdriver from
the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen. 2. Place the tail light with the tab, arrow 2, on
the anchor of the body and push onto both of
Carefully pull out the tail light from the body the threaded bolt.
toward the front, arrow 2. Ensure that the wir‐
ing is not damaged.
3. Press on the tail lights until flush and tighten

both of the nuts.
4. Pull the plug out of the bulb holder and have
the tail light wiring hang outside. 4. Mount the cover. Make sure that the plastic
tabs of the cover are correctly seated in the
Replacing the bulbs corresponding recesses of the body.
1. Loosen the three fasteners, arrow 1, on the

bulb holder.
279
Lights in the tailgate 2. Press the nonworking bulb gently into the
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
Vehicles with halogen headlights ▷ Upper bulb: reversing light
Follow the safety information, refer to page 274. ▷ Lower bulb: inner brake light
Reversing light: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL Only vehicles with halogen headlights:
Inner brake light: 21-watt bulb, H21WLL ▷ Lower bulb, 5-watt: tail light
Tail light: 5-watt bulb, P21WLL
Installing the bulb holder
Vehicles featuring LED headlights 1. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
Follow the safety information, refer to page 274. new bulb and attach the bulb holder.
Reversing light: 21-watt bulb, P21WLL Connect the plug to the bulb holder.
Inner brake light: 21-watt bulb, H21WLL 2. Make sure that the bulb holder is correctly
and firmly seated.
Accessing the lights
1. Open the tailgate. Central brake light and license plate
2. Pull out the cover at the recessed grip.
lights
These lights are made using LED technology. In
the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
or repair shop.
Vehicle battery
3. Remove the plug from the bulb holder. Maintenance

The battery is maintenance-free.
Replacing reversing light and inner brake The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
light service life of the battery.
1. Loosen the fasteners, arrow 1, on the bulb More information about the battery can be re‐
holder. quested from a dealer’s service center or another
Remove the bulb holder from the tail light, ar‐ qualified service center or repair shop.
row 2.
Replacing the vehicle battery
General information
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that you have a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop register
the vehicle battery to the vehicle after the battery
has been replaced. Once the battery has been
registered again, all comfort features will be avail‐
280
able without restriction and any Check Control chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
messages displayed which relate to comfort fea‐ aid terminals in the engine compartment.
tures will disappear.
Safety information Starting aid terminals

In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 285, in the
NOTE
engine compartment with the engine off.
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can
damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle
Power failure
functions. There is a risk of personal and prop‐
erty damage. Only vehicle batteries that are After a power loss, some equipment needs to be
compatible with your vehicle type should be in‐ newly initialized or individual settings updated, for
stalled in your vehicle. Information on compati‐ example:
ble vehicle batteries is available at your dealer’s ▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the positions
service center. again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
Charging the battery
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
General information
Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently Disposing of old batteries
charged to guarantee that the battery remains Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
usable for its full service life. er’s service center or another qualified
A discharged battery is indicated by a red service center or repair shop or take
indicator light. them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐ transport and storage. Secure the battery so that
lowing cases: it does not tip over during transport.
▷ When making frequent short-distance drives.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a
month. Fuses
▷ Steptronic transmission: when parked for
long periods of time in selector lever position Safety information
D, R or N.
WARNING
Safety information
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload elec‐
trical lines and components. There is a risk of
NOTE fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute
work with high voltages and currents, which of another color or amperage rating.
means that the 12 volt on-board network can
be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of
damage to property. Only connect battery
281
Accessing the fuses

The fuses are located in the glove compartment.
1. Open the glove compartment.

2. Swing the cover down, arrow.
Information on the fuse types and locations, as

well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is
found on a separate sheet in the fuse box.
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you
have a dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop replace the
fuses.
282
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and Warning triangle
options
The warning triangle is located on the inside of
the tailgate.
Hazard warning flashers Move the warning triangle sideways and remove
it.
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents regu‐
larly and replace any expired items promptly.
The button is located in the center console.
The red light in the button flashes when the haz‐ Storage
ard warning flashers are activated.
The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area on
the left in the storage compartment.
Emergency Request
Intelligent emergency call
Concept
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐
quest can be triggered automatically by the sys‐
tem or manually.
Intelligent emergency call establishes a connec‐
tion with the BMW Response Center.
283
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
General information If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until

Only press the SOS button in an emergency. the voice connection has been established.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request ▷ The LED flashes green when a connection to
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable condi‐ the BMW Response Center has been estab‐
tions. lished.
The BMW Response Center then makes
Overview contact with you and takes further steps to
help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW
Response Center can take further steps to
help you under certain circumstances.
For this, data is transmitted to the BMW Re‐
sponse Center which serves to determine the
necessary rescue measures. E.g., the current
position of the vehicle, if it can be established.
Even if you can no longer hear the BMW Re‐
SOS button in the roofliner. sponse Center through the loudspeakers, the
BMW Response Center may still be able to
hear you.
The BMW Response Center ends the Emer‐
▷ The Assist system is functional. gency Request.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent
emergency call: the SIM card integrated in Jump-starting
the vehicle has been activated.
General information
Automatic triggering If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
Under certain conditions, for instance if the air‐ started using the battery of another vehicle and
bags trigger, an Emergency Request is automati‐ two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with
cally initiated immediately after an accident of fully insulated clamp handles.
corresponding severity. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS but‐ Safety information
ton.
Manual triggering DANGER
1. Touch the cover. Contact with live components can lead to an

electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐
2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED
ger to life. Do not touch any components that
on the button illuminates green.
are under voltage.
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an Emer‐
gency Request has been initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the Control
Display, the Emergency Request can be
aborted.
284
WARNING
If the jumper cables are connected in the incor‐
rect order, sparking may occur. There is a risk
of injury. Pay attention to the correct order dur‐
ing connection.
NOTE
A special connection on the body acts as the
In the case of body contact between the two battery negative terminal.
vehicles, a short circuit can occur during jump-
starting. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that no body contact occurs. Connecting the cables
To prevent personal injury or damage to both ve‐
hicles, adhere strictly to the following procedure.
Preparation
1. Open the cover of the BMW starting aid ter‐
1. Check whether the battery of the other vehi‐
minal.
cle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage in‐
formation can be found on the battery. 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
battery, or to the corresponding starting aid
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power con‐ terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
sumers in both vehicles.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of
the cable to the positive terminal of the bat‐
Starting aid terminals tery, or to the corresponding starting aid ter‐
minal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding engine or
body ground of assisting vehicle.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the neg‐
ative terminal of the battery, or to the corre‐
sponding engine or body ground of the vehi‐
cle to be started.
The starting aid terminal in the engine compart‐
ment acts as the battery's positive terminal. Starting the engine
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and

let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
285
If the first starting attempt is not successful, Roll or push, refer to page 124, the vehicle.
wait a few minutes before making another at‐
tempt in order to allow the discharged battery Tow truck
to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
Tow-starting and towing

Safety information Your vehicle should be transported with a tow
truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
WARNING
NOTE
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the The vehicle can become damaged when lifting
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a and securing it.
risk of an accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety There is a risk of damage to property.
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing. ▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.
Steptronic transmission without
xDrive: transporting the vehicle
Steptronic transmission with
General information
xDrive: transporting the vehicle
The vehicle must not be towed if the front
wheels are touching the ground.
General information
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Safety information
Pushing the vehicle
NOTE
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the dan‐
The vehicle can be damaged when towing the ger area, it can be pushed for a short distance.
vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is a risk of
Roll or push, refer to page 124, the vehicle.
damage to property. Have vehicle transported
only with lifted front axle or on a loading plat‐
form.
Pushing the vehicle

To remove a broken-down vehicle from the dan‐
ger area, it can be pushed for a short distance.
286
Tow truck
NOTE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incor‐
rectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur.
There is a risk of damage to property. Correctly
attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the
tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the fol‐
lowing:
NOTE
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
The vehicle can become damaged when lifting around corners.
and securing it.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
There is a risk of damage to property. secured with an offset.
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow Tow rope
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts. When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that
the tow rope is taut.
Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable the
Towing other vehicles vehicle to be towed without jerking.
General information Tow fitting

Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
ing on local regulations. General information
If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify
the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a
warning triangle in the rear window.
Safety information
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of the tow‐
ing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be
towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried
be possible to control the vehicle's response. in the vehicle.
There is a risk of an accident! Make sure that
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or
the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is
rear of the vehicle.
heavier than the vehicle to be towed.
287
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit,

refer to page 273, are together in the cargo area.
Use of the tow fitting:
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the ve‐
hicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads
only.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for in‐
stance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fit‐
ting.
Safety information
NOTE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there
may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fit‐
ting. There is a risk of damage to property. Fol‐
low the notes on using the tow fitting.
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to

push it out.
Tow-starting
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the Steptronic transmission.
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties cor‐
rected by a dealer’s service center or another
288
Care MOBILITY
Care
Vehicle features and Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
options
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
cific and optional features offered with the series. ▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
It also describes features that are not necessarily 31.5 in/80 cm.
options or country versions. This also applies to Automatic vehicle washes
ing these functions and systems, the applicable Safety information
NOTE
Washing the vehicle Improper use of automatic vehicle washes can
cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of
General information damage to property. Follow the following in‐
structions:
Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves
in the area below the windshield when the hood ▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
is raised. those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐
ter. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the ▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
vehicle. higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
the chassis.
Steam blaster and high-pressure ▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
washer
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
Safety information the exterior mirrors.
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain
sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
NOTE
tem.
When cleaning with high-pressure washers,
components can be damaged due to the pres‐
sure or temperatures being too high. There is a Driving into a vehicle wash with a
risk of damage to property. Maintain sufficient Steptronic transmission
distance and do not spray too long continu‐
ously. Follow the operating instructions for the General information
high-pressure washer. In a vehicle wash, the vehicle must be able to roll
freely.
Roll or push the vehicle, refer to page 124.
289
MOBILITY Care
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in Safety information

the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from
the outside when in selector lever position N. A
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock WARNING
the vehicle. Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐
gerous and harmful to your health. There is a
Driving out of a vehicle wash risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open
the doors or windows. Only use products in‐
Make sure that the remote control is in the vehi‐
tended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the in‐
cle.
structions on the container.
Start the engine. Starting the engine, refer to
page 108.
Vehicle paint
Headlights
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use General information
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents. Regular care contributes to driving safety and
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance value retention. Environmental influences in
from insects, with shampoo and wash off with areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
water. taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect
the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
extent of your vehicle care to these influences.
scraper.
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
After washing the vehicle grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
mediately to prevent the finish from being altered
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
or discolored.
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can
be reduced. The heat generated during braking
Matte finish
dries brake discs and brake pads and protects
them against corrosion. Only use cleaning and care products suitable for
vehicles with matte finish.
Completely remove all residues on the windows,
to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and
to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear. Leather care
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a
cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Vehicle care Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe
in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear
Vehicle care products and premature degradation of the leather sur‐
face.
General information To guard against discoloration, such as from
BMW recommends using vehicle care and clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
cleaning products from BMW. Suitable care roughly every two months.
products are available from a dealer’s service Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
center or another qualified service center or re‐ cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
pair shop. more visible.
290
Care MOBILITY
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and Chrome surfaces

grease will gradually break down the protective Carefully clean components such as the radiator
layer of the leather surface. grille or door handles with an ample supply of
water, possibly with shampoo added, particularly
Upholstery material care when they have been exposed to road salt.
General information Rubber components

Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum Environmental influences can cause surface soil‐
cleaner. ing of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bever‐ water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning.
age stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
with a suitable interior cleaner. care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐ vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
terial vigorously. or noises.
Safety information Fine wood parts

Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
NOTE nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft
cloth.
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of clothing
can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of
Plastic components
damage to property. Ensure that any Velcro®
fasteners are closed.
NOTE
Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such
Caring for special components as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease remov‐
ers, fuel, or such, can damage plastic parts.
Light-alloy wheels There is a risk of damage to property. Clean
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth lightly
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do with water.
not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets
above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufacturer's Plastic components are e.g.:
instructions. ▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can ▷ Roofliner.
destroy the protective layer of adjacent compo‐
▷ Light lenses.
nents, such as the brake disc.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
them. The heat generated during braking dries ▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
brake discs and brake pads and protects them ▷ Painted parts in the car's interior.
against corrosion. Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner.
291
MOBILITY Care
Safety belts Displays/Screens/protective glass

of the Head-up Display
WARNING
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt NOTE
webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of any
belts. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. kind can damage the surface of displays and
Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the screens. There is a risk of damage to property.
safety belts. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and

thus have a negative impact on safety. NOTE
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety The surface of displays can be damaged with
belts clipped into their buckles. improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to
Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if property. Avoid pressure that is too high and do
they are dry. not use any scratching materials.
Carpets and floor mats Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐
WARNING play using a microfiber cloth and commercially
available dish-washing soap.
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the
pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in Long-term vehicle storage
the vehicle such that they are secured and can‐ When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
not enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor three months, special measures must be taken.
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can Further information is available from a dealer’s
be safely attached to the floor. Do not use service center or another qualified service center
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor or repair shop.
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐

rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a mi‐
crofiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To
prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth
in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth
moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐
gent.
292
Care MOBILITY
293
294
REFERENCE
Technical data .......................................................................................... 296
Appendix ................................................................................................... 298
Everything from A to Z ............................................................................ 300
295
REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
General information
The technical data and specifications in this urement method. Detailed values can be found in
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. the approval documents, on labels on the vehicle
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, or can be obtained from a dealer’s service center
for instance due to the selected special equip‐ or another qualified service center or repair shop.
ment, country version or country-specific meas‐
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, for in‐
model version, equipment or country-specific stance due to the selected special equipment,
measurement method. tires, load and chassis version.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for instance a roof antenna, roof
BMW X1
Width with mirrors inches/mm 81.1/2,060
Width without mirrors inches/mm 71.7/1,821
Height inches/mm 62.9/1,598
Length inches/mm 175.4/4,455
Wheelbase inches/mm 105.1/2,670
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.5/11.4
296
Technical data REFERENCE
Weights
X1 sDrive28i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,575/2,075
Load lbs/kg 899/408
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,403/1,090
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,282/1,035
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
X1 xDrive28i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,729/2,145
Load lbs/kg 899/408
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,469/1,120
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,381/1,080
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 16.1/61.0 Fuel quality, refer to

page 242
297
REFERENCE Appendix
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehi‐
cle are listed here.
Updates made after the editorial deadline

These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual
contain updates made after the editorial dead‐
line:
▷ Driving: starting a gasoline engine, refer to
page 108.
▷ Climate control: air conditioner: rear window
defroster, refer to page 199.
▷ Climate control: automatic climate control:
rear window defroster, refer to page 203.
298
Appendix REFERENCE
299
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication 8
ABS, Antilock Brake System 171 Arrival time 140
ACC, Active Cruise Control 177 Ash tray 210
Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 127 Assistance when driving off 176
Accessories and parts 10 AUTO intensity 202
Activated-charcoal filter 203 Automatic climate control 200
Activation times, parked-car ventilation 204 Automatic cruise control with Stop&Go func‐
Active Cruise Control, ACC 177 tion 177
Adaptive brake lights, see Brake force dis‐ Automatic Curb Monitor 100
play 169 Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger air‐
Additives, engine oil types 267 bags 152
After washing vehicle 290 Automatic headlight control 146
Airbags 150 Automatic locking 85
Airbags, indicator and warning light 151 Automatic recirculated-air control 202
Air circulation, see Recirculated-air Automatic tailgate 80
mode 198, 202 Automatic transmission, see Steptronic trans‐
Air conditioner 197 mission 121
Air conditioning 198, 201 Automatic unlocking 85
Air, dehumidifying, see Air condition‐ Automatic vehicle wash 289
ing 198, 201 AUTO program, automatic climate control 201
Air distribution, manual 199, 202 AUTO program, intensity 202
Air flow, air conditioner 199 Auto Start/Stop function 109
Air flow, automatic climate control 202 Auto washing 289
Air pressure, tires 244 Average fuel consumption 139
Air vents, see Ventilation 203 Average speed 139
Alarm system 85 Axle loads, weights 297
Alarm, unintentional 87
Alertness assistant 169 B
All-season tires, see Winter tires 250
All-wheel-drive 173 Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 92
Ambient light 149 Backrest, seats 91
Antifreeze, washer fluid 120 Backrest, width 93
Antilock Brake System, ABS 171 Bad road trips 225
Anti-slip control, see DSC 171 Band-aids, see First-aid kit 283
Anti-theft protection, lug bolts 257 Battery replacement, vehicle battery 280
App, BMW Driver’s Guide 65 Battery replacement, vehicle remote control 72
Approach control warning with city light braking Battery, vehicle 280
function 161 Being towed, see Tow-starting and towing 286
Approved axle load 297 Belts, safety belts 94
300
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Beverage holder, cup holder 219 Cargo area 213

Blocking, power window 88 Cargo area, enlarging 213
Bluetooth connection 57 Cargo area, loading 229
Blu-ray, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Cargo area partition net 216
Entertainment, Communication 8 Cargo area, storage compartments 220
BMW Assist, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Cargo position, rear seat backrest 213
Entertainment and Communication 8 Cargo, stowing and securing 229
BMW Driver’s Guide app 65 Carpet, care 292
BMW Homepage 8 Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas sys‐
BMW Internet page 8 tem 225
BMW maintenance system 271 CBS Condition Based Service 271
Bonus range, ECO PRO 234 Center armrest 218
Bottle holder, see Cup holder 219 Center console 38
Brake assistant 171 Central Information Display (CID), see Control
Brake discs, break-in 224 Display 40
Brake force display 169 Central locking system 75
Brake lights, brake force display 169 Central screen, see Control Display 40
Brake pads, break-in 224 Changes, technical, see For Your Own
Braking, information 226 Safety 10
Breakdown assistance 283 Changing parts 273
Break-in 224 Changing wheels 256
Brightness of Control Display 54 Changing wheels/tires 249
Bulb replacement 274 Chassis number, see Vehicle identification num‐
Bulb replacement, front 275 ber 14
Bulb replacement, rear 278 Check Control 130
Bulbs and lights 274 Checking the oil level electronically 265
Button, Start/Stop 107 Children, seating position 102
Bypassing, see Jump-starting 284 Children, transporting safely 102
Child restraint system 102
C Child restraint system LATCH 104
Child restraint systems, mounting 103
Calendar, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Child safety locks 106
Entertainment, Communication 8 Child seat, mounting 103
California Proposition 65 Warning 10 Child seats 102
Calling up mirror adjustment 85 Chrome parts, care 291
Calling up seat adjustment 85 Cigarette lighter 210
Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelli‐ Cleaning, displays 292
gent Safety 160 Climate control 197, 200
Camera-based cruise control, ACC 177 Closing the tailgate with no-touch activation 77
Camera lenses, care 292 Clothes hooks 220
Camera, rearview camera 190 Coasting 235
Can holder, see Cup holder 219 Coasting with engine decoupled, coasting 235
Care, displays 292 Coasting with idling engine 235
Care, vehicle 290 Cockpit 36
Care, washing the vehicle 289 Combination switch, see Turn signals 113
Cargo 228
301
Combination switch, see Wiper sys‐ Cruise control without distance control, see
tem 113, 117 Cruise control 183
Comfort Access 75 Cruising range 134
COMFORT program, driving dynamics 175 Cup holder 219
Compact wheel, see Emergency wheel 260 Current fuel consumption 135
Compartments in the doors 218
Compass 208 D
Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 57
Compressor 251 Damage, tires 248
Computer, see Onboard Computer 138 Data memory 11
Concierge Service, see Owner's Handbook for Data protection, settings 55
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Data, technical 296
Condensation on windows 203 Date 53
Condensation under the vehicle 227 Date display 134
Condition Based Service CBS 271 Daytime running lights 147
Confirmation signal 85 DCC, see Cruise control 183
ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐ Defrosting, see Defrosting the windows 199
gation, Entertainment and Communication 8 Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 203
Connecting device 56 Defrosting the windows 199
Connecting mobile phone 56 Dehumidifying, air 198, 201
Connecting smartphone 56 Deleting personal data 55
Connecting telephone 56 Deletion of personal data 55
Connections 56 Destination distance 140
Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Device list 56
Entertainment, Communication 8 Digital clock 134
Container for washer fluid 120 Digital compass 208
Continued driving with a flat tire 156, 160 Dimensions 296
Control Display 40 Dimmable exterior mirrors 100
Control Display, settings 52 Dimmable interior mirror 100
Controller 41, 42 Direction indicator, see Turn signals 113
Control systems, driving stability 171 Display, engine temperature 140
Convenient closing with the remote control 71 Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 148
Convenient opening with the remote control 71 Displays, care 292
Coolant 269 Disposal, coolant 270
Cooling, maximum 201 Disposal, vehicle battery 281
Cooling system 269 Distance control, see PDC 186
Cornering light 147 Distance to destination 140
Corrosion on brake discs 227 Divided screen view, split screen 46
Cosmetic mirror 210 Door key, see Remote control 74
Coupling, see Pairing 56 Downhill control, see HDC Hill Descent Con‐
Courtesy lights during unlocking 71 trol 173
Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 72 Drive-off assistant 176
Cruise control 183 Drive-off assistant, see DSC 171
Cruise control, active 177 Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 160
Cruise control with distance control, see Cam‐ Driver profiles 82
era-based cruise control, ACC 177 Driver profiles, exporting profiles 83
302
Driver profiles, importing profiles 83 Engine compartment 262

Driver’s Guide app, see BMW Driver’s Guide Engine compartment, working in 263
app 65 Engine coolant 269
Driving Dynamics Control 175 Engine idling when driving, coasting 235
Driving Excitement, SPORT 141 Engine oil 265
Driving instructions, break-in 224 Engine oil, adding 266
Driving instructions, ECO PRO 234 Engine oil change 268
Driving mode 175 Engine oil filler neck 266
Driving notes, general 225 Engine oil types to add 267
Driving on bad roads 225 Engine start, jump-starting 284
Driving on racetracks 227 Engine start, see Starting the engine 108
Driving stability control systems 171 Engine stop 109
Driving style analysis 236 Engine temperature, display 140
Driving tips 225 Entering a destination, see Owner's Handbook
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 171 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 173 tion 8
DVD, Video, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8 Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Com‐
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 171 munication 8
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 173 Entering a vehicle wash 289
Equipment, interior 206
E Error displays, see Check Control 130
ESP Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 171
ECO PRO 232 Exchanging wheels/tires 249
ECO PRO bonus range 234 Exhaust gas system 225
ECO PRO display 232 Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 225
ECO PRO driving mode 232 Exiting a vehicle wash 289
ECO PRO driving style analysis 236 Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 100
ECO PRO mode 232 Exterior mirrors 99
ECO PRO program, driving dynamics 176 Exterior mirrors, malfunction 99
ECO PRO tips 234 External start 284
Efficiency display, ECO PRO 234 External temperature display 134
Efficient driving 234 External temperature warning 134
EfficientDynamics information 234
Electronic oil measurement 265 F
Electronic Stability Program ESP, see DSC 171
E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Failure message, see Check Control 130
Entertainment, Communication 8 False alarm, see Unintentional alarm 87
Emergency release, fuel filler flap 241 Fan, see Air flow 199, 202
Emergency Request 283 Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 94
Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 127 Filler neck for engine oil 266
Emergency wheel 260 Finding charging stations, see Charging stations
Energy Control 135 and points of interest, see Owner's Handbook
Energy recovery 135 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 109 tion 8
Engine, automatic switch-off 109 Fine wood, care 291
303
First-aid kit 283 Glare shield 210

Flat tire, changing wheels 256 Glass sunroof, initialize the system 90
Flat tire message, FTM 159 Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sunroof 88
Flat tire message, TPM 155 Glove compartment 218
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 158 GPS geolocation, vehicle position 53
Flat tire, repairing 251 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 153 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Flat tire warning light, FTM 159 Gross vehicle weight, approved 297
Flat tire warning light, TPM 155
Flooding 226 H
Floor carpet, care 292
Floor mats, care 292 Halogen headlights 275
Fogged up windows 199 Handbrake, see Parking brake 111
Fold-away position, wiper 116, 119 Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 207
Fold back rear seat backrests 213 Hands-free kit, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
Foot brake 226 gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
For Your Own Safety 10 Hazard warning flashers 283
Front airbags 150 HDC Hill Descent Control 173
Front fog lights 148 Head airbags 150
Front fog lights, halogen, bulb replacement 277 Headlight control, automatic 146
Front lights 275 Headlight courtesy delay feature 146
Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic deacti‐ Headlight flasher 113
vation 152 Headlight flasher, bulb replacement 276
Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator light 153 Headlight glass 274
Front seats 91 Headlights 275
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 158 Headlights, care 290
Fuel 242 Head restraints, front 96
Fuel cap 240 Head restraints, rear 97
Fuel consumption history 234 Head-up Display 142
Fuel consumption, see Average fuel consump‐ Head-up Display, care 292
tion 139 Head-up Display, see Memory function 98
Fuel filler flap 240 Heated steering wheel 101
Fuel gauge 133 Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 229
Fuel quality 242 High-beam Assistant 147
Fuel recommendation 242 High beams 113
Fuel, tank capacity 297 High beams/low beams, see High-beam Assis‐
Fuse 281 tant 147
High beams, bulb replacement 276
G Hill Descent Control HDC 173
Hills 227
Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 176
Remote Control 206 Holder for beverages 219
Gasoline 242 Homepage 8
Gear shift indicator 136 Hood 263
General driving notes 225 Horn 36
General settings 52 Hot exhaust gas system 225
304
Hotline, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Interior mirror, manually dimmable 100
Entertainment, Communication 8 Interior motion sensor 87
HUD Head-up Display 142 Internet connection 60
Hydroplaning 226 Internet hotspot 60
Internet page 8
I Interval display, service requirements 135
Interval mode 114, 118
Ice warning, see External temperature warn‐ In the vicinity of the center console 38
ing 134 In the vicinity of the roofliner 39
Icy roads, see External temperature warning 134 In the vicinity of the steering wheel 36
Identification marks, tires 246
Identification number, see Vehicle identification J
number 14
iDrive 40 Jacking points for the vehicle jack 258
Ignition key, see Remote control 74 Jam protection system, glass sunroof 89
Ignition off 107 Jam protection system, windows 88
Ignition on 107 Jump-starting 284
Indicator and warning lights, see Check Con‐
trol 130 K
Indicator light, see Check Control 130
Individual air distribution 199, 202 Key/remote control 74
Individual settings, see Driver profiles 82 Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 75
Inductive charging, see Wireless charging, see Key, see Remote control 70
Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertain‐ Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 124
ment, Communication 8 Knee airbag 151
Inflation pressure, tires 244
Inflation pressure warning FTM, tires 158 L
Info Display, see Onboard Computer 138
Information 8 Label on recommended tires 250
Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 154 Label, runflat tires 251
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 158 Lane departure warning 167
Instrument cluster 129 Lane threshold, warning 167
Instrument lighting 148 Language, on the Control Display 52
Integrated key 74 LATCH child restraint fixing system 104
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 64 Launch Control 127
Intelligent emergency call 283 Leather, care 290
Intelligent Safety 160 LED headlights 277
Intended use 10 LEDs, light-emitting diodes 274
Intensity, AUTO program 202 Light 145
Interior equipment 206 Light-alloy wheels, care 291
Interior lights 149 Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 274
Interior lights during unlocking 71 Lighter 210
Interior lights with the vehicle locked 72 Lighting 145
Interior mirror 99 Light replacement 274
Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 100 Light replacement, front 275
Interior mirror, compass 208 Light replacement, rear 278
305
Lights and bulbs 274 Menus, operating, iDrive 40

Light switch 145 Messages 54
List of all messages 54 Messages, see Check Control 130
Load 229 Microfilter 199, 203
Loading 228 Minimum tread, tires 248
Loading position 213 Mirror 99
Location, vehicle position 53 Mirror, see Memory function 98
Locking, automatic 85 Mobile communication devices in the vehi‐
Locking, settings 84 cle 226
Low beams 145 Mobility System 251
Low beams, automatic, see High-beam Assis‐ Modifications, technical, see For Your Own
tant 147 Safety 10
Low beams, bulb replacement 275 Moisture in headlight 274
Lower back support 92 Monitor, see Control Display 40
Lug bolt lock 257 Mounting of child restraint systems 103
Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage Moving sun visor 210
rack 229 MP3 player, see Audio, see Owner's Handbook
Lumbar support 92 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
M Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 36
Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Maintenance 271 Entertainment and Communication 8
Maintenance requirements 271 Music hard disk, see Owner's Handbook for Nav‐
Maintenance, service requirements 135 igation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Maintenance system, BMW 271
Make-up mirror 210 N
Malfunction displays, see Check Control 130
Manual air distribution 199, 202 Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Manual air flow 199, 202 Entertainment and Communication 8
Manual brake, see Parking brake 111 Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints 96
Manual operation, fuel filler flap 241 Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints 97
Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con‐ Neutral cleaner, see Wheel cleaner 291
trol 187 New wheels and tires 249
Manual operation, rearview camera 190 Notes, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ Entertainment, Communication 8
tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Master key, see Remote control 74 O
Matte finish 290
Maximum cooling 201 OBD Onboard Diagnosis 272
Maximum speed, display 136 OBD, see OBD Onboard Diagnosis 272
Maximum speed, winter tires 250 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 191
Measurement, units of 53 Octane rating, see Recommended fuel
Medical kit 283 grade 243
Memory function 98 Odometer 133
Menu in instrument cluster 138 Office, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
Menus 42 tertainment and Communication 8
306
Offroad trips 225 Performance Control 173

Oil 265 Personal profile, see Driver profiles 82
Oil, adding 266 Person warning with City light braking func‐
Oil change 268 tion 164
Oil change interval, service requirements 135 Plastic, care 291
Oil filler neck 266 PostCrash 170
Oil types to add, engine 267 Power failure 281
Old batteries, disposal 281 Power windows 87
Onboard Computer 138 Pressure, tires 244
Onboard literature, printed 64 Pressure warning FTM, tires 158
Onboard vehicle tool kit 273 Printed onboard literature 64
Online Entertainment, see Owner's Handbook Profiles, see Driver profiles 82
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ Programmable memory buttons, iDrive 47
tion 8 Protective function, glass sunroof 89
Online Owner's Manual 66 Protective function, windows 88
Opening and closing 70 Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 41, 42
Opening the tailgate with no-touch activation 77
Operating concept, iDrive 40 R
Operating via iDrive 42
Operating with the Controller 42 Racetrack operation 227
Operation via touchscreen 44 Radiator fluid 269
Optional equipment 9 Radio-operated key, see Remote control 74
Outside air, see Automatic recirculated-air con‐ Radio-operated remote control, opening/clos‐
trol 202 ing 70
Owner's Manual media 64 Radio-ready state 107
Owner's Manual, printed 64 Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment and Communication 8
P Rain sensor 114, 118
Rear lights 278
Paint, vehicle 290 Rear seats 93
Panic alarm, see Panic mode 86 Rear socket 212
Panic mode 86 Rearview camera 189
Panoramic glass sunroof 88 Rear window defroster 199, 203
Parallel parking assistant 192 Recirculated-air filter 203
Park Distance Control PDC 186 Recirculated-air mode 198, 202
Parked-car ventilation 204 Recommended fuel grade 243
Parked vehicle, condensation 227 Recommended tire brands 250
Parking aid, see PDC 186 Refueling 240
Parking assistant 192 Remaining range 134
Parking brake 111 Remote control/key 74
Parking lights 145 Remote control, additional 73
Partition net 216 Remote control for audio, see Owner's Hand‐
Parts and accessories 10 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
Passenger's side mirror, tilting downward 100 cation 8
Pathway lines, rearview camera 191 Remote control, loss 73
PDC Park Distance Control 186 Remote control, malfunction 73
307
Remote control, opening/closing 70 Seats, front 91

Remote control, universal 206 Seats, rear 93
Remote services, app, see Owner's Handbook Securing cargo 229
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ Selection list in instrument cluster 138
tion 8 Selector lever, see Steptronic transmission 121
Replacing parts 273 Sensors, care 292
Replacing wheels/tires 249 Service and warranty 11
Reporting safety malfunctions 15 Service requirements, Condition Based Service
RES CNCL button, see Camera-based cruise CBS 271
control, ACC 177 Service requirements, display 135
RES CNCL button, see Cruise control 183 Services, ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual
Reserve warning, see Range 134 for Navigation, Entertainment and Communica‐
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 154 tion 8
Retreaded tires 250 Servotronic 175
Roadside parking lights 146 SET button, see Camera-based cruise control,
Rolling code hand-held transmitter 207 ACC 177
RON recommended fuel grade 243 SET button, see Cruise control 183
Roofliner 39 Settings, locking/unlocking 84
Roof load capacity 297 Settings on the Control Display 52
Roof-mounted luggage rack 229 Shifting, Steptronic transmission 121
Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Shift paddles on the steering wheel 126
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Side airbags 150
RSC Runflat System Component, see Runflat Signaling, horn 36
tires 251 Signals when unlocking 85
RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ Sitting safely 91
tertainment, Communication 8 Size 296
Rubber components, care 291 Ski and snowboard bag 216
Runflat tires 251 Slide/tilt glass roof 88
SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's Hand‐
S book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
cation 8
Safe braking 226 SMS text message, supplementary 133
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front Snow chains 255
passenger seat 96 Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnosis 272
Safety belts 94 Sockets 211
Safety belts, care 292 Software update 62
Safety locks, doors, and windows 106 SOS button 283
Safety switch, windows 88 Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
Safety systems, airbags 150 gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Saving fuel 231 Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 260
Screen, see Control Display 40 Speed, average 139
Screwdriver, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 273 Speed Limit Info 136
Sealant 251 Speed limits, display 136
Seat heating, front 93 Speed warning 141
Seating position for children 102 Split screen 46
Seat, see Memory function 98 Sport displays 141
308
SPORT program, driving dynamics 175 Tailgate, opening with no-touch activation 77
Stability control systems 171 Tailgate via remote control 72
Standard equipment 9 Tail lights 278
Start/stop, automatic function 109 Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 10
Start/Stop button 107 Technical data 296
Starting the engine 108 Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for Entertainment and Communication 8
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
Status control display, tires 154 tion, Entertainment, Communication 8
Status information, iDrive 47 Television, TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
Status of Owner's Manual 9 gation, Entertainment, Communication 8
Status, vehicle 143 Temperature, air conditioner 198
Steering assistance 175 Temperature, automatic climate control 201
Steering wheel, adjusting 101 Temperature display for external tempera‐
Steptronic Sport transmission, see Steptronic ture 134
transmission 121 Temperature, engine 140
Steptronic Sport transmission with double Terminal, starting aid 285
clutch, see Steptronic transmission 121 Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 85
Steptronic transmission 121 Thigh support 92
Steptronic transmission with double clutch, see Tilt alarm sensor 86
Steptronic transmission 121 Time 52
Stopping the engine 109 Time of arrival 140
Storage compartment in the rear 219 Tire damage 248
Storage compartments 217 Tire identification marks 246
Storage compartments, locations 217 Tire inflation pressure 244
Storage, tires 250 Tire inflation pressure monitor, see FTM 158
Storing the vehicle 292 Tire pressure 244
Stowing and securing cargo 229 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 153
Suitable devices 57 Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 251
Suitable mobile phones 57 Tires, changing 249
Summer tires, tread 248 Tire sealant, see Mobility System 251
Sun visor 210 Tires, everything on wheels and tires 244
Supplementary Owner's Manuals 64 Tires, runflat 251
Supplementary SMS text message 133 Tire tread 248
Switch for driving dynamics 175 Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
Switch, see Cockpit 36 tainment and Communication 8
Symbols 9 Tool 273
Symbols in the status field 47 Total vehicle weight 297
SYNC program, automatic climate control 203 Touchpad 45
Touchscreen 44
T Towing 286
Tow-starting 286
Tachometer 133 TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 153
Tailgate, automatic 80 Traction control 173
Tailgate, closing with no-touch activation 77 TRACTION, driving dynamics 173
Tailgate opening 79
309
Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Vehicle features and options 9
gation, Entertainment, Communication 8 Vehicle identification number 14
Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 127 Vehicle jack 258
Transmission lock, releasing manually 126 Vehicle key, see Remote control 74
Transmission, Steptronic transmission 121 Vehicle paint 290
Transporting children safely 102 Vehicle position, vehicle location 53
Tread, tires 248 Vehicle status 143
Trip computer 140 Vehicle storage 292
Triple turn signal activation 113 Vehicle wash 289
Trip odometer 133 Vehicle, washing 289
Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 133 Ventilation 203
Turning radius lines, rearview camera 191 Ventilation, see Parked-car ventilation 204
Turn signal, bulb replacement, halogen head‐ VIN, see Vehicle identification number 14
lights 275 Voice activation system 49
Turn signal, bulb replacement, LED head‐ Voice command response, see Owner's Hand‐
lights 277 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐
Turn signals, operation 113 cation 8
Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 278
TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ W
tertainment, Communication 8
Warning and indicator lights, see Check Con‐
U trol 130
Warning displays, see Check Control 130
Unintentional alarm 87 Warning messages, see Check Control 130
Units of measurement 53 Warning triangle 283
Universal remote control 206 Warranty 10
Unlock button, see Steptronic transmission 121 Washer fluid 120
Unlocking, automatic 85 Washer nozzles, windshield 115, 119
Unlocking, settings 84 Washer system 113, 117
Unpaved roads, cross-country trips 225 Washing the vehicle 289
Updates made after the editorial deadline 9 Water on roads 226
Upholstery care 291 Weights 297
USB connection 59 Welcome lights 146
USB interface, general information 212 Welcome lights during unlocking 71
USB port, see USB interface 212 Wheel cleaner 291
Use, intended 10 Wheels, changing 249
Using a smartphone via voice activation 49 Wheels, everything on wheels and tires 244
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 158
V Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 153
WiFi connection 60
Vanity mirror 210 Window defroster, rear 199
Vehicle battery 280 Windows, powered 87
Vehicle battery, replacing 280 Windshield washer fluid 120
Vehicle, break-in 224 Windshield washer nozzles 115, 119
Vehicle care 290 Windshield washer system 113, 117
Vehicle care products 290
310
Windshield washer system, see Washer/wiper

system 113, 117
Windshield wiper, see Wiper system 113, 117
Winter storage, care 292
Winter tires, suitable tires 250
Winter tires, tread 248
Wiper 113, 117
Wiper blades, replacing 273
Wiper fluid 120
Wiper, fold-away position 116, 119
Wiper system 113, 117
Wireless charging dock, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 8
Wireless charging, see Wireless charging, see
Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, Communication 8
Wood, care 291
Word match concept, navigation 44
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 273
xDrive 173
311
*BL2120596001*
01402120596 ue
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.

Your customized Owner's Manual as an app.
Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
*BL2120596001*
01402120596 ue

2018 BMW x1 7

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2018 BMW x1 7

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2018 BMW x1 7

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LINK:

CONTENT & A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01402120596 - II/18

© 2018 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Owner's Manual for Navigation,

options ▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.

For Your Own Safety Parts and accessories

water. For more information go to aware of any applicable warranty limitations or

Control via mobile devices Data is exchanged over a secure connection,

dynamics and safety systems for a short period

The vehicle identification number can also be

It is also possible to display the vehicle identifica‐

Reporting safety defects

For Canadian customers

Your BMW at a glance

Buttons for the central locking

Locking the vehicle

Comfort Access With automatic tailgate operation:

Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front

Locking the vehicle

Touch the surface on the door handle of the driv‐

▷ Press button on the remote control 4 Backrest tilt

▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the

Seats, mirrors, and steering

1. Fold the lever down.

Driver's door Controller

Buttons on the Controller

1 Safety switch Press once: call up main menu.

4 Opening/closing the tailgate Open the Communication menu.

Switch console Open the Media/Radio menu.

Open destination input menu for navi‐

Open navigation map.

Press once: open the previous dis‐

Terminating the voice activation system Starting/stopping the engine

Steptronic transmission, Sport

Canada: roadside parking light Washer/wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and

Illuminate the vehicle on one side.

Front fog lights. Brief wipe and switching off

Automatic headlight control.

Press the lever down.

Rain sensor Rear window wiper

Activating/deactivating Switching on the rear window wiper

Clean the rear window

Cleaning the windshield and

Pull the lever.

Canada: wiper systemWiper Rain sensor

Press button on the wiper lever.

Adjusting the sensitivity

▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

Brief wipe and switching off

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield and

Push wiper lever down.

Pull the wiper lever towards you.

Rear window wiper Button Function

Switching on the rear window wiper Air flow, manual.

Air distribution, manual.

Rear window defroster.